Home

Owners Manual Pdf

1. Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero all one call two cancel three four five confirmation prompts continue delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound Espanol add location Francais help 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s home redial language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones mobile mute mute off send set up towing assistance phone settings or phone set up new entry transfer call no Uconnect Tutorial other voice training pair a phone work phone pairing pairing yes phonebook previous phone book record again a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must
2. 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 446 Reformulated Gasoline 000000008 424 Retrigerant sede axe RE Fans i oe 504 Reminder Seat Belt o o ooooooo 43 A INDEX 579 Remote Control Door Locks nd ish tete ate ertet es 20 Security Alam dd ed ES 18 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan o o o 20 Remote Starting System o ooooooooooooo o 26 Replacement Bulbs sss sisa ties gira aaaea 535 Replacement Keys 2 4 2 500424408 2604 4 16 Replacement PartS o o o o o o oo ooo ooo o oo 495 Replacement Tires x sisas ceay ia ear a 411 Reporting Safety Defects o o o o o 559 Restraint Head ono mirad ea d 158 Restraints Child o 77 Retractable Cargo Area Cover o o 205 Roll Over Warning llle 4 Roof Type Carrier llle eese 212 Rotation Tires llle 413 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 101 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 103 Safety Defects Reporting oooooomoooo ooo 559 Safety Exhaust Gas 1 6 less 100 Safety Information Tit8 o ooooooo oo o 388 O 99 Satellite Radio Antemnma 277 303 Schedule Maintenance 0000008 546 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 50 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 56 Energy Management Feature 56 Lap Shoulder Belt Operation 47 Lap Shoulder BeltS
3. 041035271 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Units e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Heading Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Uconnect Phone Displays if equipped e Audio Mode Display e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The system allows the driver to select information by 041035449 sede the following buttons mounted on the steering EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons ipa MENU Button Push and release the MENU button to scroll MENU through the main menus Fuel Economy Warn ings Timer Units System Personal Settings or to exit submenus 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN COMPASS Button Push and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus RIGHT Arrow Button Push and release the RIGHT arrow button for gt access to main menus submenus or to select a DOWN Arrow Button personal setting in the setup menu Push and release the DOWN arrow button to V scroll downward through the submenus When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile 1 6 km of distance travelled e Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime
4. B LIFIGATE 222 ak 3a Re ca 39 W SAFETY TIPS veo ior EO E RC ERA ll OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 41 Transporting Passengers ooooooooo o Important Safety Precautions 41 Exhaust Gas ti iced RR bade ns Seat Belt Systems oooooooooomooo ooo 42 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Supplemental Restraint System SRS 61 Vehicles i 24 oue prada d Child Restraints is ex gee aie ee 77 D O a The Vehicle 15 2 ce marte mer Ce Rae EUR Transporting Pets o o o ooooooooo o 98 E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 98 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These automatic transmission numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 3 Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position 2 Place the ignition in the ACC Accessory position 4 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 021410235 Vehicle Key Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may
5. a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Engine Temperature Warning Light sa e What It Means Light Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 E minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool whichever comes first If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tem perature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for ser vice Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further infor mation 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Oil Temperature Warning Light ur What It Means Oil Temperature Warning Light E This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high If the light turns on while driving stop the SERA vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Charging System Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s nonessential electrical devi
6. 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move the safety catch located under the front edge of To open the hood two latches must be released IDE nod neat Tie center and Yale Me hoon 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel 031306201 Hood Safety Latch Location Lift the hood prop rod clipped to the right side left side facing hood of the engine compartment to secure the Hood Release Lever hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface 031306200 Prop Rod Location CAUTION To prevent possible damage Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 CAUTION Continued Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights
7. 5 a N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING Do not at
8. o oooooooo oo 44 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 49 Pregnant Women o o ooooooooooooooooso 55 Seat Belt Extender 2 iei Re Reo 54 Seat Belt Pretensioner llle een 55 Seat Belt Reminder 00 00005 43 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 lesen 529 Seat Belt Reminder ener at Ee 43 580 INDEX IA Seat Bells c ved ae od ome a tee ken da to edd 42 101 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 50 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 50 Child Restraint cs caia x P Ede ts 77 Extender iac cer ebeter Reha Ry p as 54 Front Seat iugera oe deed a RGM SES 42 44 47 Inspection eese sesse hee RP a tassis 101 Operating Instructions o o o ooooooo o 47 Pregnant Women oes Teiwaar aatia adaa eee 55 PretensionerS i eee ee ee s 55 Rear Seats uri dpa deme EE te aes 44 Reminder aiii ogee de ones ee es 224 Untwisting Procedure 000 49 Seal siria a ay e EO Gig ER OR 152 153 Adjustment o oo oo ooooooo ooo 152 153 155 Heated cea nx ambe o 154 Lumbar Supporte ocd ane eta tae een ys 157 Rear bolding 232 terere s 162 Rear Folding Sedan ooooooooooooo 162 Seatback Release oooooooomoo omo 157 A S nube eod idiot bt wees 157 Security Alarm s cresce Tanes esitis n e 18 228 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 540 Sentry Key Immobilizer oooooooooo o 15 Sentry Key Programming ooooooooooo o o 17
9. Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided Your authorized dealer can check your trans mission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans mission fluid level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
10. Voice Command COMIN AMS veo ag verre qr ea Re rb i Rer 147 System Operation llle 145 Voice Training ies RR RR Ren 151 Voice Recognition System VR o o o o 145 Warning Roll Over 24 4 5 2224 3449 da ee 4 Warnings And Cautions 0006 7 Warranty Information 500 559 Washer Adding Ehud rie er RR bie 506 Washers Windshield o 174 Washing Vehicle cse RR ERR RR 524 Wheel And Wheel Trim onnu nuaa aana aaa 525 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care llle 525 Wind Buffeting osa eem a doge de es 195 Window Fogging soii ind aaa cda 328 WindOWS 5 432 tia aye sane er See Ue pea 37 Power A INDEX 585 Windshield Defroster 101 319 325 Windshield WasherS 172 174 Windshield Wiper Blades o o o o o o 506 Windshield Wipers matawa daa Ekaia 172 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 506 Wipers Intermittent oooooooooooo 174 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The
11. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils This symbol certifies 0W 20 5W 20 OW 30 5W 30 and 10W 30 en gine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 0L 2 4L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera tures This engine oil improves low temperature
12. Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle is not in PARK automatic transmission or vehicle is in motion manual transmission Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Doors Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e e e e e e e Gate with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open and a single chime Headlamps or Park Lamps On Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted System Fault Key In Ignition Low Tire Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System Service TPM System Engine Oil Change Indicator System If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil chan
13. Maintaining Your Ve hicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked PENES vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as a problem injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your BAREIN TIPS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with t
14. injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward The seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position has been reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch The seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are
15. tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid Continued WARNING Continued splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore con
16. 145 Glass Cl aning x toni hae dew oh EORR det a 528 Gross Axle Weight Rating 434 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 431 433 GVWR xiu 5 a n RD Re RT dai ale oe 431 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 114 Hazard Warning Flasher ooooooo ooo 451 H adlights z cepere e Perd CR pe does 537 Cleaning s aes eser e Reb ea eds eats 528 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 170 On With Wipers 2 isses 170 175 Passing eap duc De Re bon RR OS 170 Replacing cui cacao a Ue Re ees 537 A io Baran aes Bat dpe 167 Head Restraints 00020 158 Heated Mirrors llle ee eee 113 Heated Seats 2 2 0000 ce ee ee 154 Heater erpai raei eae oe bee bake chee Rade we 317 Heater Engine Block o ooooommoooo o 338 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 170 Hill Descent Control 246 387 Hill Start Assist 0 eee 377 Hitches Trailer Towing streie pied eee eee 436 HomeLink Garage Door Opener 184 Hood Release l l 164 A abo CUBA Ra qae aod RAT 12 Key ci so ps b Re Te aa 12 Ignition Key Removal o oooooooooooo oo 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key ooooooooo oo 15 Information Center Vehicle 248 Inside Rearview Mirror o o ooo oocooo ooo o o 110 574 INDEX IN Instrument Cluster 229 230 243 Instrument Panel And Controls 218 Instrument Panel
17. Continued CUPHOLDERS e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders There are vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat WO loaned cupholders located in the front tery even more quickly Only use these intermit 274 030 tently and with great caution Front Cupholders After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Ly 90631 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear STORAGE p Glove Compartment And Storage Bin Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment gt 309083172 Rear Cupholders 035209107 Storage Bins 1 Upper Storage Bin 2 Lower Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 To open the lower glove compartment pull outward on Door Storage en The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage areas 035206143 Glove Compartment 035206217 Front Door Storage 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To open the upper storage compartment push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open 035206216
18. Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in low L Off Road if equipped with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution Allow engine A STARTING AND OPERATING 365 WARNING and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicles abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you sta
19. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 87 Octane 0 15 Ethanol a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Tran
20. HDC will no longer function If the HDC Indicator Light begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool 388 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades A STARTING AND OPERATING 389 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example
21. Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position e Fach time the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously except for when the vehicle is started while in 4L Range e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop 386 STARTING AND OPERATING HN when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activa
22. Maintaining Your Air Bag System Side Air Bags es ee Re awe x Red 66 Transporting Pets a sk seb b assena aksi 98 Air Bag Deployment 0244 0 soso toese ts eted 61 Alt Bag Light e2333ex E X RE 73 101 225 Aur Bag Maintenance sss ss eid ra es 75 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 501 Air Conditioner MaintenanCe o o o o o o 503 Air Conditioning llle 317 Air Conditioning ControlS 317 Air Conditioning Filter o oo o 328 504 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 327 329 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 503 504 Air Conditioning System 317 321 503 Air Pressure Tires 2l 401 Alarm Security Alarm i e 228 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio 277 303 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 511 539 A INDEX 567 Capacities aaa Pace ea io 539 Disposal i kw one eser tad Road anes 514 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 374 Anti Lock Warning Light o o o ooooo 239 Appearance Care es s e ed e erue 523 Assistance TOWING sea ka ee TR RR Re 128 Assist EB Start 2 3 4a da iee fret RS 377 Automatic Dimming Mirror 110 Automatic Door LockS 33 34 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 321 Automatic Transaxle 2 0 0 2 eee mom
23. Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can push the Voice Command button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 f you can push the Voice Command button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send sto
24. Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 To activate the Uconnect Phone simply push the Phone button and follow the audible prompts for direc tions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the Phone amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pair ing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions 1 Activate the Bluetooth on your mobile phone 2 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 3 After the Ready prompt and the fo
25. Rear Door Storage CONSOLE FEATURES The floor console contains both an upper and lower Upper Storage Compartment storage compartment y UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 To open the lower storage compartment lift upward on WARNING the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart ment and lift the lid open Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area Cargo Cover d AS The cargo area trim panels include two notches for Lower Storage Compartment mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo dates the reclining rear seat 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To install the Cargo Cover insert either end of the cover Using the handle pull the cover toward you and guide into one of the two notches located in the rear trim the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides panels With one of the cover ends installed push inward of the rear trim panel on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel 035406966 Cargo Cover Guides Rear Trim Notches a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING Removable Load Floor The cargo area load floor is removable and ca
26. Sentry Key Replacement o ooooooooooooooo 16 Service Assistance leen 555 Service Contacts five el eer RE TR XS 557 Service Manuals llle 560 Settings Personal ooooomoooommoooo oo 254 Setting The Clock oooooooo 262 282 291 Shift Lever Override o oo ooooo ooo 482 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 340 Shoulder Belt ol tE a4 dd erre 44 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 328 Signals TURN enc E 108 243 538 Snow Chains Tire Chains o 412 A dra dre Rer arde cire dei d 405 A INDEX 581 Spare Times a Ce d 406 407 408 456 Spark Plugs npe pie ies reds 540 Speed Control Accel Decl suis adi e 181 ATCO catamarca e aos ia ue 179 RESUME sira braia Ia 179 Speed Control Cruise Control 177 Star ng isse a O aaa 335 Automatic Transmission 336 Cold Weather 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 337 Engine Fails To Start o oooooooooooo 337 Manual Transmission seen 335 Remote s suiras y di aches he PR a 26 Starting Procedures less 335 Steering Power ua sa s UR Ge CX RO SR Y ERR Re rid 369 Tilt COMIN oe so roro re OL a Ae a te ah 176 SLOTABO En 535 Storag DIN iu d ature a alk E iore ke eda as 202 Storage Vehicles x x em a ERR 327 Stuck Breeing i es drach FU sore id ord 480 Sun ROOS e se iao bee RE A URP RDLSS 193 Sun Visor Extension 10 0 0c eee eee 113 Sup
27. Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES Under certain conditions the mobile device being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning Blower Control 045607539 045607535 Manual Temperature Controls The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs 045607540 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilation system in any mode The blower spee
28. The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting And Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer A STARTING AND OPERATING 435 Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch
29. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre is fee kHz BRA MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 80 64 56 48 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 80 64 56 48 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 WMA Specifi cation WMA Sampling Fre quency kHz 44 1 and 48 Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback Of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs
30. When driving off road shift into low L Off Road if equipped and activate the 4WD LOCK This will provide additional traction and activates the numerous off road features to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the sustained lower gearing low L Off Road if equipped with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to cross over obstacles and descend hills with improved control and less effort NOTE For maximum off road performance premium fuel is recommended While the vehicle will operate on regular fuel when in L Off Road mode if equipped the engine has been calibrated for maximum performance using premium fuel Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the transaxle to low L Off Road if equipped if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain 362 STARTING AND OPERATING HN headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost
31. earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit recessed area under the sealant bottle Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Push the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and storage area located on the bottom of the air pump precautions 7 a the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the CAUTION JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a
32. o 212 tig NUES 2 i ads hoe rem Dm ed 452 Lumbar SUPpOrE esas Renee dE e rs 157 Maintenance Free Battery o o o o 501 Maintenance Procedures o o oo ooo oo 496 Maintenance Schedule o o oo como 546 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 232 494 Manual Service o oooooooo oo 560 Manual Transaxle Fluid Level Check 522 523 Lubricant Selection o o oooooo oo 523 Manual Transmission 0 338 522 Fluid Level Check 522 Frequency Of Fluid Change 522 Lubricant Selection oo o 522 542 Map Reading LightS oooooooooooo o 171 Master Cylinder Brakes 516 Methati s cates ant la e Seine aaa 425 Mini Trip Computer ssie reei remete 000 2005 246 MITOS oa aa ee aa ae ees 110 Automatic Dimming ooooooooooooo o 110 Electric Powered o ooooooooo ooo 112 Exterior Folding es s e ata 112 Heated a zuo na x ed ee 113 Outside iu oc paca e eot doa ER RR M eR 111 Rearview saudi Ager RP E 30 110 a pog gung gs 113 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System oooo oo o 414 MOPAR Parts o 495 559 MTBE EIBE 3 02d ciedad 425 Multi Function Control Lever 166 New Vehicle Break In Peri0d 98 Occupant Restraints oooo
33. parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407547 Multifunction Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Headlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third to turn on the parking lights Turn the end of the lever to detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight the second detent to turn on the headlights system 031407548 031407553 Headlight Control Headlight Switch 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE With the engine running and the multifunction lever in Fog Lights If Equipped the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn a e levels The front fog light switch is on the multifunc Daytime Running Lights If Equipped tion lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam head e Hens Wel come E Rae lights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever Lights lower intensity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the gear selector is in any position except PARK Lights On Reminder Gu If the headlights or parking lights are
34. rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchora
35. the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions e If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right 4 until D is once again displayed in the instru ment cluster You can shift in or out of the Auto
36. vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped 2 BeltAlert is a feature intend
37. 030406199 Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio sys tem the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for sup ported phones For Uconnect customer support e U S residents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian Residents visit UconnectPhone com or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con
38. 12 Fluid Level Check o o o ooo o ooo 521 Automatic Transmission 341 343 518 520 Autostick o o o o ooooooomooomoo ooo 355 Fluid And Filter Changes 519 521 Fluid Level Check o o o o ooooo ooo 519 Fluid Type aa 518 520 542 Gear Ranges ss cse rie eiia 344 351 Special Additives 4 518 520 o decia ax odora eR da 355 357 Ade Ehud 2 tex dn bank S PERS EN RI un as 542 Battery s edo E ER GONE RAS 230 501 Charging System Light oooo o o 230 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Seaside id end eee dica 101 Body Mechanism Lubricati0N 505 B Pillar Location ius a PR RES 395 Brake Assist System pisno riesa senti inaa e n 377 Brake Fluid outros ar Bade eR RU aes 542 Brake Parking 1i isses see m 370 Brakes umi a Praef uer Bae a a 373 Brake System lees 373 516 Master Cylinder 0 0 0 0 0 000000 516 Parking save stad Luo d del oibus Des 370 Warning Light uec a xke niaya eR 226 Brake Transmission Interlock 343 Bulb Replacement lees 535 537 568 INDEX In Bulbs Light si sis cimas amine a 103 535 Calibration Compass oo ooo ooo ooo ooo 258 Camera REAP 0 aa o 182 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 539 Capacities Fluid ue aes sack ares eee deos 539 Caps Filler FUG onsite ci weenie d See px ee UE Exe dg d 428 Oil Engine scc Rees 491 492 499 Power S
39. A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and or that slow pressure loss is occurring In these cases optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed 1 Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence In any situation in which the message on the display is See manual it is ESSENTIAL to refer to the contents of the Wheels paragraph in the Technical data chapter strictly com plying with the indications that you find there A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised Stop the vehicle avoiding sharp braking and steering Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible Each
40. AUX Button Pushing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 inch 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual
41. Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Air Bag Warming Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during startup stays on or turns on e while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This ry light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Brake Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake BRAKE application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reser voir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at United States the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detecte
42. Cover llle 528 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 529 Integrated Power Module Fuses 531 Interior Appearance Care o o oo o ooo ooo ooo 527 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 174 Introduction see I 3 e Rh 4 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 150 312 Jacking Instructions o oooooooooommooo o 457 Jack Location cesse quce de a REG 455 Jack Operation sois e es 454 457 Jump Starting o oooooocororronson s 476 Key In Reminder vecinas ei ee n 14 Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 Key Programming 26 6 eee 17 Key Replacement i vieni Rem dans 16 KEYS acne ae ak a i sket Bd or RO es 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer oooooooooo o 15 Lane Change And Turn Signals 538 Lane Change Assist iss ce sa RR 170 Lap Shoulder Belts ooooooooooo oo ooo 44 L atch g gasses ie teen oi od da 103 FOOD es 25 eui ge eed sR eb GR a a 164 Lead Free Gasoline ise br ae ess 424 Leaks Fluid ie semi epee hee a 103 Life Of THES current 410 Liftgate Sedan occ em Ee ee ER 39 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 210 Lightbulbs i 2 ues ma ned eph ERE HET 103 535 A nod gett at i pete 103 166 PVA etere Kea ead es eaa ac 73 101 225 Baek Up setie ei hoe sto tei 538 Brake Assist Warning A INDEX 575 Brake Warning cees sse har ia oes 226 Bulb Replacement sre rp aii knee Rag deris 537 Cargo 24e deem
43. Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer STARTING AND OPERATING 405 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or Snow Tires mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall WARNING If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You nal equipment tires Use snow tires could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury only in sets of four fail
44. Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible A STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent collisions in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which co
45. ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view 3 Push and hold the Homelink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed e To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Non Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Prog
46. OPERATING 359 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED This feature provides full time on demand four wheel drive 4WD 051906185 Four Wheel Drive Switch Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi tional traction is needed in sand deep snow or loose traction surfaces activate the 4WD LOCK switch by pulling up once and releasing This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the cluster This can be done on the fly at any vehicle speed To deactivate simply pull on the switch one more time The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out NOTE Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Electronic Stability Control ESC in Starting And Op erating for further information ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles 360 STARTING AND OPERATING HN An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or ab
47. Plate Into Buckle 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low plate into the buckle until you hear a click across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 6 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point Positioning The Lap Belt 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above able and not resting on your neck The retractor will the latch plate withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded web
48. Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations UCONNECT 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details UCONNECT 130 042305232 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases
49. RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors Once unlocked the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode 022206147 Opening The Liftgate Gas props support the liftgate in the open position NOTE Although the liftgate has no inside release However because the gas pressure drops with tempera mechanism the liftgate trim panel includes an opening ture it may be necessary to assist the props when with a snap in cap that provides access to release the opening the liftgate in cold weather latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags e Supplemental Active Head Restraints e Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay
50. Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do notinduce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471 4 Remove the cap
51. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent inter val previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Mist Feature Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE
52. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Restraint System 9 lt Anchor Tether LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt
53. TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC
54. The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call e For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Push the Phone Ke button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion To add names to the Uconnect phonebook using Voice Commands N Ea U UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Push the Phone Ke button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith
55. Units In The EVIC odometer and Uconnect GPS system units can be changed between US and Metric Push and hold the RIGHT gt arrow button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Push and release the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Push and release the DOWN V arrow button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Push and release th
56. WMA player an ipod or a microphone and utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped No function q pp a Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details B Dolby TIME Button Auxiliary Mode f Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Push the TIME button to change the display from elapsed Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby playing time to time of day The time of day will display Laboratories for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol No function ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec SET Button Auxiliary Mode tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Mac
57. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure de Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound E In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flash ing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security
58. a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well NOTE e Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an author
59. a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 9 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle 10 To disengage the mini latch plate from the mini buckle for storage insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the c 4 webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Insert U a A the mini latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position 022610239 Detaching Mini Latch And Buckle WARNING If the mini latch plate and mini buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the mini latch plate and mini Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed WARNING ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if when worn the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Seat Belt Extender Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury
60. a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing INTRODUCTION 5 seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an ud person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION e 1 E Li 8 x A igh ig imm E i sot ARNG Ruo ANO B mbr AIRBAG VIT TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL on Teme TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ZA hm amp mm ons A Noc bh tn o9 A Raa oO ELECTRONIC 010533317 INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision bodily injury and or death It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this en
61. a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations STARTING AND OPERATING 443 G o Du LA c eI e 057003766 057003765 Four Pin Connector Seven Pin Connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park 1 Battery 5 Ground 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn 3 Right Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 4 Electric Brakes 444 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur while in this range use the AutoStick shift control if equipped to select a lower gear ratio NOTE e Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer to
62. accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation gt The Uconnect Voice Command system allows 4 you to control your AM FM radio disk player USB mass storage class device iPod family of devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device satellite radio and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you push the Voice Command button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists options push the Voice Command button listen for the beep and say your command Pushing the Voice Command button while the sys tem is speaking is known as barging in The system wil
63. and on the must use the seat belt for the center position You can tether strap of the child seat so that you can more then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard anchorages positions Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical in 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for stallation instructions that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head Always follow the directions of the child restraint restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to all child restraint systems will be installed as described move it to its rear most position to make room for the here child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 3 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position 4 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 5 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
64. and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may dama
65. any reason a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or
66. around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475 2 Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 d Unepi dfe Sealant Hose o darbon Volt outlet 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
67. at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued 440 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your 2 GTW vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch 3 GAWR Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on Towing Requirements Tires 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transm
68. bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air Event Data Recorder EDR bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will Continued 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicl
69. cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions aaa MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 549 Maintenance Chart Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Mileage or time passed whichever comes first eisisisisisisis s s s s s s epea a e a a a eS S Slislscisles I S YL BOSA IBIS IS sz OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 i E e e e e e e e e e Or Kilometers 3 8 8 S 3 Sisisisis sisisis J gisis g 2 8 si eis si gig e c oOo Oo o rr A N N Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints Inspect front suspension boot seals tie rod ends X X X and replace if necessary Inspect brake linings replace if necessary Check X X X X X X X park brake function adjust if necessary 550 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN Mileage or time passed whichever comes first esisisisisisisis S S S S S S Ss S Sy SS 9 29 Q Ss Ss aS a cea S Alale sl RIS lasl el ela 2 ss 8 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 orsonewn gls lg 33185818 88 8 8188 3 8 8 8 3 8 5 89 98 3 3 Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X Replace air conditioning cabin air filter X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs X X X X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 15
70. close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 2 ise THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window If your
71. depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is 368 STARTING AND OPERATING HN always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for acc
72. driveline 5 Additional damage to the drivetrain could result FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels e Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re elevated quirements can cause severe engine transmission e FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck or drivetrain Se o ge fron improper pit all wheels OFF the ground ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limite Warranty a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 All Transmissions Without The Ignition Key If you must use the accessories wipers defroster etc Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed while being towed the key must be in the ON RUN with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position The only position not the ACC position Make certain the trans approved method of towing without the ignition key is mission remains in NEUTRAL with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 491 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 24L 492 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 493 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 493 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAI
73. each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel s and or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS Brake Limited Differ ential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differen tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the A STARTING AND OPERATING 381 other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC cor rects for over steering or under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steering or under steering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over steer or under steer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Un
74. household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft cloth A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp cloth 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical
75. includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files
76. including the trip functions Pushing the RIGHT arrow button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Francais or NL depending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language NOTE Uconnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Uconnect Phone Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Auto Lock Doors If Equipped When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Push and hold the RIGHT L7 arrow button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmission or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmission Push and hold the RIGHT L arrow button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection RKE Unlock When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second push to unlock the remaining locked doors When Re mote Unlock All Doors is selected all of the doors will unlock at the first push of the RKE transm
77. indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly push the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate STARTING AND OPERATING 371 NOTE When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before p
78. indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Canadian Gate Operator To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate push and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Tr
79. infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height AS E allowed by the child seat directions exactly when installing an infant
80. inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition A STARTING AND OPERATING 403 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor
81. inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions your strongest bones will take the force in a colli 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and sion adjust the seat e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front you from injury during a collision You are more seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the are meant to be used together webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a around your lap collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch
82. is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch 340 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lu bricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmis sion table Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units in mph km h Engine Size Acceleration 1 to 2 2to3 3to4 4to5 Rate All Engines Accel 14 23 23 37 29 47 45 72 Cruise 12 19 18 29 25 40 32 52 A STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Downshifting When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade a downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur P hifting will i fuel roper downs 1 ting WL improve ue economy an dene d prolong engine life CAUTION AUTOMATIC TRANS
83. is not equipped with or this feature is not 8 available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save the time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Push the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW F
84. it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Anti Lock Brake ABS Indicator Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light Yellow Telltale What It Means Light Low Fuel Warning Indicator Light M When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6 L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound 4WD Warning Light If Equipped Yellow Tell tale Light What It Means 4WD Warning Light If Equipped This light monitors the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD system The light will come on for a bulb chec
85. lighter in the heating position 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034636797 Power Outlet Fuse Location a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution e After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watt AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience This outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power device
86. located on the center instrument panel area You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF Push the switch once to select HI level heating Push the switch a second time to select LO level heating Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl evel If the HI level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LO level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the dis play will change from HI to LO indicating the change When the LO level heating is selected the system auto matically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
87. media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD a Push the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN RW FF Push and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays
88. mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 030407085 This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror The On Off symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto dimming feature is enabled UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is CAUTION moving in reverse To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the Automatic Dimming Mirror vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle 030406002 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Power Mirrors The po
89. move Manual Door Lock Knob the vehicle Pg 021806186 WARNING CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended e For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on the driver s and front passenger s door panel Push this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate NOTE To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key 021806187 Driver Power Door Lock Switch 1 Unlock 2 Lock a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Auto Lock Doors If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Auto Lock Doors Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel f
90. must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668566 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e S Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Seats With LATCH What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower an chorages No Yes Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position The inner anchorages are 15 5 inches 390 mm apart Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the cen
91. negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Jeep STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS 16MK74 126 AC Ii 2015 FCA US LLC All Rights Reserved Third Edition Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC Printed in U S A
92. o 170 Dipsticks Power Steering es aese cerrarse piue 369 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 514 Door Locks Child Protection Door Lock Rear Doors 35 Door Locks o o ooooooooo ooo ooo 30 ado BH 30 REMOTE escenas eren WAS IE 30 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 30 Door Locks Automatic 0 0000000 33 Door Opener Garage 6 6 6 ee 184 DownshifBhg sueo to coa a ias EROR ela 341 Driver s Seat Back Tilt 157 Driving seis tesa tosca A ae aS ree RA S oe 359 Off Pavement asc ok ded dea 360 oro MM TT D eae 360 Electrical Power Outlets oooooomoooo o 196 Electric Remote Mirrors o ooooooooooooo 112 Electronic Brake Control SysteM 374 Anti Lock Brake System o oo oooooo o 374 Electronic Roll Mitigation o o o 386 Traction Control System 0 2 llle eee 380 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 177 Electronic Stability Control ESC 381 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 231 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 248 A INDEX 571 Emergency In Case Of AAA seuss as oreet e Ree enis 454 Jump Starting rosso ratas n erue ed 476 TOWING ines dk ach EUREN RU eo lo Dre we 483 Emission Control System Maintenance 494 Engine s oops drs Reh MR eee ted 491 492 Air Cleaner 21222229 bo eae ewe nn 501 Block He
93. off This indicates system completely and closes the outside air intake that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the 5 ry average person is 72 F 22 C however this may vary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than NOTE expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind without affecting automatic operation the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the blower knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected 045607536 In off position the blower will shut off Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the
94. once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character Dis format types Program Type play 16 Digit Character Dis Oldies Oldies Program Type play Personality Persnlty No program type or un None Public Public defined Rhythm and Blues R amp B Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Music Rel Musc Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pushing
95. optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a trans
96. or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as
97. or child restraint e After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in in the vehicle by the seat belt the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause infant or child restraint It could come loose in a serious personal injury collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s Continued 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are lo
98. or death in a collision Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini latch plate and mini buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the mini latch plate and mini buckle If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest lap belt is not long enough and only use in the position your authorized dealer can provide you with a recommended seating positions Remove and store Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used the Seat Belt Extender when not needed only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 0226075266 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slac
99. or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Continued 416 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to be come inoperable After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal te
100. point not more than 3 16 inch 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Please see your authorized dealer for service Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 inch 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD 4WD Models Only Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Ch
101. post of the discharged vehicle ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis charged battery Disconnect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the vehicle with the discharged battery Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular devices etc Eventu
102. ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if equipped 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Priorto giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands
103. recircu CX amp 5 lation However pushing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recircu lation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog push the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pushing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vent
104. replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedules section for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main
105. running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause Continued CAUTION Continued severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second third and fourth gears direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift 348 STARTING AND OPERATING HN control refer to AutoStick Six Speed Automatic Trans missi
106. shown on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tes
107. soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1 000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile phone s SIM card phonebook is downloaded a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic down loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Push the Phone Ke button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone
108. the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command button Following the beep say Mute 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM To un mute the Uconnect Phone e Push the Voice Command button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa using Voice Command 1 Push the Voice Command button and say Trans fer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Push the Phone amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest p
109. the fuel door is located WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS IMPORTANT The warning indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes sage and or acoustic signal when applicable These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Manual which you are advised to read carefully in all cases Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication All active telltales will display first if applicable The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status Some telltales are optional and may not appear 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IN Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a A chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains un buckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
110. the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Push the SET RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in t
111. the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers 344 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gear
112. to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call e Push the Phone amp button to accept the call To reject the call push and hold the Phone Ke button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone e Push the Phone amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call
113. transmission shift lever only has PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will manually select from a set of predefined transmission gear ratios and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 352 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substit
114. tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pushing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time push and hold again to return to normal display a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button i
115. turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be dis played based on the current values in the DTE calcula tion and the current fuel tank level Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in Starting And Operating for system operation 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows hours minutes seconds Elapsed time can be reset by pushing and holding the RIGHT L arrow button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START Display Units Of Measure In To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until US or METRIC appears Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Push and release the MENU or DOWN V arrow button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC then push and release the RIGHT L arrow button Use the RIGHT gt arrow button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature
116. used to obtain a start from Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 337 WARNING Continued in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting procedure another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emer gencies for further information WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start Extreme Cold Weather Below 22 F Or 30 C the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of serious personal injury E an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended CAUTION If Engine Fails To Start To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the If the engine fails to start after you have followed the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to Normal Starting and Extreme Cold Weather proce 15 seconds before trying again dures it may be flooded Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key decrease as the engine warms up After Starting 338 STARTING AND
117. window Sit upright in the center of the seat Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you Continued 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued properly In some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment Side Impacts In side impacts the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
118. with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MPS files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession dis
119. you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted NOTE Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can not be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries To delete or erase ALL Uconnect phonebook entries using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 3 After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted NOTE Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook To hear a list of ALL names in the Uconnect phonebook using Voice Commands 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available 3 To call one of the names in the list push the Voice Command button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point 4 The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish
120. you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 556 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following inform
121. 0 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes X X first Replace rear drive assembly RDA fluid X X Replace power transfer unit PTU fluid X X Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police X X taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing CVT only a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 551 eage or time passed whichever comes first ale sieglsgig 2 39 S S8 8 8 8 e eL eee ee expe e e ede sex e e e e e e e e Qo cw 5eoerTLc6ooo rs xg OrYears 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o ole leo e 9 8 sis s ss ssg 888 85 88 8 8 8 8 8 8 alol lols Ni oo tTt co o w io To oe vY ooo r A F PS S S alalia Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter X CVT only Change the automatic transmission fluid six speed only if you frequently drive on rough or unpaved roads on mountain roads on short trips in heavy X X city traffic during hot weather or if you use the ve hicle for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing heavy loading taxi police delivery service com X X X mercial service off road desert operation or more than 5096 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C 552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN Mileage or time pass
122. 1 Ignition Off Operation ooo ooooooo 196 Troubleshooting Tips 4 5 s eoe RR owes 192 M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 196 General Information i sisse a 193 M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 199 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 193 M CUPHOLDERS 4 22am RERO sidra RES 201 Opening Sunroof Express 194 E STORAGE oiu Sada aban ak ES 202 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 194 Glove Compartment And Storage Bin 202 Closing Sunroof Express 194 Door Strage six Rr ai ea Gs 203 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 19 M CONSOLE FEATURES 204 Pinch Protect Feature essere 195 N CARGO AREA FEATURES sae 205 Venting Sunroof Express 195 Cargo Light eusa ao 205 Sunshade Operati0M ooooooooooooo 195 Cargo Cover Loss e paa ec ea Pacem EE 205 Wind Buffeting iners 195 Removable Load Floor o 207 a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Cargo Tie Down Loops isss aeii imie tasis 208 Rear Window Defroster 211 Fold Down Speakers If Equipped 209 M ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED 212 ll REAR WINDOW FEATURES 210 Rear Window Wiper Washer 210 a 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the
123. 2 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center console or glove compartment A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compart ment 044136844 AUX USB Connector Ports Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pushing radio switches as described
124. 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Ce
125. 5 mph 56 km h At 35 mph 56 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode as described above TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving however ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph 56 km h The ESC OFF Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily push the ESC Off switch This will restore the ESC On mode of operation NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING In the Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only A STARTING AND OPERATING 385 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator
126. A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicles front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Continued 436 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting t
127. ACC or Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ON RUN mode With the A C air filter removed and the blower operating the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes resulting in personal injury The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 3 Pivot the glove compartment downward 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover indicate airflow direction through th
128. ARNING Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera If you continue operating the vehicle when the ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi severe transmission damage or transmission failure nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Green Telltale Indicator Lights Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Tell tale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn signal as selected as well as the exterior turn signal lamp s front and rear as selected when amp D the multifunction lever is moved down LEFT or up RIGHT NOTE e A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Park Headlight ON Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park Headlight ON Indicator Light p 07 This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped Green Telltale Light FO Front Fog Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog light
129. ARNING e Tread Wear Ride Comfort Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading er can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them cause collisions ed ore Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result Tire Pressure in overheating and tire failure Overinflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve e Safety and Vehicle Stability hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Economy Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over resp
130. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued No objects should be placed over or near the air some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi covers or attempt to open them manually You may tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad damage the air bags and you could be injured vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk because the air bags may no longer be functional of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad The protective covers for the air bag cushions are Vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal designed to open only when the air bags are collisions including some that may produce substantial inflating vehicle damage for example some pole collisions e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more truck underrides and angle offset collisions severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In ways wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce
131. Automatic Locking Retractor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull dow
132. Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABICs deploy downward covering the side win dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events WARNING e Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions In order for the SABICs to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for
133. Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Temperature Control Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knob for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knob for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knob for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knob for comfort User selectable to any speed to any air delivery point User selectable to any air delivery point Air Temperature Control A C Operation 0456051810 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE Thecenter instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Le
134. Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive trip information and temperature display temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving aaa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Control Buttons RESET Button To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then push and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel The following displays can be reset or changed e Trip A e Trip B Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Push and release the STEP button on the instru 040541179 ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Mini Trip Control Buttons Trip A STEP Button Push the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func tions Odometer Trip A Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster
135. Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror Each light is turned on by pushing the button Push the button a second time to turn the 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE light off The lights also come on when a door is opened NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the pushed a second time so be sure they have been turned second detent off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 7 The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located on the end of the lever For information on the rear wiper washer refer to Rear Window Fea tures in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle 031409884 Map Reading Lights a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted
136. D OPERATING HN Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Press the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Tip Start Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be
137. DUCTION coup ds a is E UR S 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 2 ce eee eee nn 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ooooooooooooooono o 105 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee 215 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 53 a RR EG ox m bee ec a d e A RC d e 331 6 WHALE TO DO IN EMERGENCIES lt 4 9 a deor ai a A a ace Roe de EUR ICA d e CRURA ROAD Y 449 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 3 a RE Ee id eG ob ng eee ate Ae P EA Eod E e Ree CE E 489 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 5 545255 964 eee A o9 Be eos E ea a ADAC Bie ee CROCI RR Se OR a 545 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee e eee 553 En INDEX oa daa ias do Ro VR a a ai dia 1 ack we pare 565 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION isse ket hebr be E RERER 4 WI WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 E ROLLOVER WARNING noaoo 4 Wi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 BI VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 4 INTRODUCTION HN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workman ship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warr
138. Disc In this mode you Radio In this mode you may say the following com may say the following commands mands e Track to change the track EJ e annel Nombor e e Next Track to play the next track spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel S EIGVIDUS DASS lo play me i e Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands e Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu e Next Track to play the next track eS o hema mene e Previous Track to play the previous track e Play to play an Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the following commands e Play to play the current track e Pause to pause the current track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track Memo Mode To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recordin
139. E In driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all occu pants to buckle their seat belts Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with out board front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This featu
140. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
141. F Pushing the RW Rewind or EF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM EM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button
142. FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Headlights On With Wipers Available With TO AChvates 24092 ias Ry PS ads ae 178 AS tn tear shee id ihi To Set A Desired Speed sss 179 Instrument Panel Dimming 171 To Deactivate L L L LLL Map Reading Lights 171 To Resume Speed ill WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 172 To Wary The pad Getting s i0 eese reri e 179 O pe PO ore s To Accelerate For Passing 181 Intermittent Wiper System 174 lI PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF Windshield Washers 1 uk ca eire a 174 BOUIDPBE amp 31 ask 924 9E eee 182 Headlights On With Wipers Available With ll GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 184 Automatic Headlights Only 175 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 185 Mist Feat eee s due emu e oe E 175 Programming A Rolling Code 186 B TILT STEERING COLUMN aac ces nme 176 Programing A Nas Rolling Code i es cus 188 WE CIS NISSPEEB CONTROL IE Canadian Gate Operator Programming 189 EQUIPPED aaa dei dt 177 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Using HomeLimk via s 191 Sunroof Maintenance o ooo ooooooomo 196 Secuela edo Ne d E OE en ros 19
143. ING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Manual Lumbar If Equipped Driver s Seatback Recline The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the inboard To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the or outboard side of the seatback Rotate the lever down outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired angle ward to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever EE upward to decrease the lumbar support lean forward and release the lever 0309053384 Outboard Lumbar Adjustment Lever Recline Lever 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Supplemental Active Head Restraints Front Head Restraints Seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Active Head Restraints AHRs are passive deployable components and vehicles with this equipmen
144. If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM s or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use low L Off Road if equipped with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tir
145. Internet at Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage HomeLink com for information or assistance before you begin programming 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Place the ignition in the ON RUN position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand held transmitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usu
146. Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call push the Voice Command button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold 1 Push the Phone Ne button until you hear a single beep e This indicates that the call is on hold e To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone Ke button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold push the Phone amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold 1 Push and hold the Phone Ke button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling push the Voice Command button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the secon
147. LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 390 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or S Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in A STARTING AND OPERATING 391 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certa
148. Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro grammed General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthori
149. MISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed i e not released e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade 342 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while J ng out Gf PARK WARNING Continued turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key WARNING Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the tion key from the vehicle a
150. NE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer
151. NG AND OPERATING 387 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph 7 km h and 6 mph 9 km h depending on terrain The system is activated by placing the vehicle in Off Road mode and placing the shift lever in LOW or REVERSE Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in Start ing And Operating for further information When HDC is properly enabled the Hill Decent Control Light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will not activate on level ground If desired HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC Full Off mode This is done by pushing and holding the ESC Off button for five seconds Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of the manual HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like normal When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving At vehicle speeds above 31 mph 50 km h
152. NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pushing the PANIC button a second time you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key in Things To Know Before Start ing for further information If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal F Separating Case Halves 021432709 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle This device complies with Part 15 o
153. NTENANCE PROGRAMS 125b upkVa ex ehe oes 494 W REPLACEMENT PARIS acm ao 495 B DEALER SERVICE x3 EY C3 Rr e 496 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 496 Engine OI aci tcd e wie aetna ed 497 Engine Oil Filter 1 n 500 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 501 Maintenance Free Battery 501 Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication o ooooooooooo Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid 506 Exhaust System 000000000 507 Cooling System oooo oooo ooo oo 510 Brake System esua na esea a nia momo 516 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE In Automatic Transmission Six Speed If Bg REPLACEMENT BULBS 234594 x ase aes 535 EAU EU A E 518 BULB REPLACEMENT eee 537 Hd aaa n ese na 520 Headlamps 0 00000 cece eee eee 537 Manual Transmission If Equipped 522 Fog Lamps enant nra isa oo oo 537 Rear Drive Assembly RDA AWD 4WD Rear Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 538 Models Only ecos ido ed 522 License Lamps 43 9 xe RR 538 Power Transfer Unit PTU AWD 4WD Models Center High Mounted Stoplamp 538 e dieat A ad B FLUID CAPACITIES ocooocccococco oo oo 539 Ape Care And Frotcton From FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS cana ios err bh eb
154. ON or Repeat Off Push the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 device scan mode which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track push the 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e SCAN button again During Scan mode pushing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pushing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or push the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pushing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display push the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scr
155. OPERATING HN ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits Five Speed Manual Transmission quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING grounded three wire extension cord You or others could be injured if you leave the The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one vehicle unattended without having the parking hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine brake fully applied The parking brake should al ENE ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Remember to disconnect the engine block heater Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal 80f7bc4b Shift Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear STARTING AND OPERATING 339 CAUTION e Launching in any gear except 1st gear will result in excessive slipping of the clutch and potentially lugging or stalling the engine Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission
156. ORC determines occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children whether the severity or type of rear impact will require who are using booster seats The locked mode is Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact o LAG AD 022607508 a Active Head Restraint AHR Components 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING e All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the ev
157. OUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Engine Check Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly y Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev eral typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be ser viced as soon as possible if this occurs A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING
158. Operation INFO ion LU Mode For MES Bey ise 2n CD Player o ee mat Remb PER Ren dh Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 302 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 315 me ad Moe RIS EOP aaa ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES 316 A ay CHIMATE CONTROLS qoprgarsioiaa 316 Using This Feature 308 Manual Heating And Am COMANN gan eus ene Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device a PAS C r 321 Using Radio Buttons o o o o o o 308 Play Mode isses 308 SS ind 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Demisters 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Radio 5 Storage Bin 6 Glove Compartment 7 Climate Controls 8 Power Outlet 040107732 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 Hazard Warning Flasher 11 ESC OFF Switch If Equipped 12 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 1 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be re
159. Push and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in this section for additional information re garding the compass Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset pushing and holding the RIGHT gt arrow button as prompted in the EVIC display to reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history infor mation will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
160. RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the cargo on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the luggage rack crossbars The luggage rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 The crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars perpendicular to the luggage rack side rails Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the first detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle e If the rear crossbar or any metallic objec
161. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button CD Player Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5
162. RTING AND OPERATING HN MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits When avail able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom mended Visit www toptiergas com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active s
163. Requests 555 ME MOPAR PARTS 0000000008 559 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 555 MH REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 559 FCA US LLC Customer Center 556 In The 50 United States And Washington SBCA Canada das Customer Center ck a cer 556 DiQu eee ee 559 In Mexico Contact 0000 nuti 557 TNC ANAS oua dados pos ae aid ony Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands 557 MAA ORDER FORMS id am 554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades sece ta are ioeo a 00000 562 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 561 TOA Wal siesta tens r aaa 561 Temperature Grades o oooo o ooo 562 a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 555 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and
164. SELECT button if equipped Set Home Clock Pushing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then push and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and sel
165. Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on push the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Push any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Push the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Pla
166. Stick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal A STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury AutoStick CVT If Equipped AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing six manually selectable gear ratios giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle perfor mance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery condi tions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation NOTE AutoStick is not available until the CVT warms up in cold weather When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position AutoStick is activated by moving the shift lever side to side Mov ing the shift lever to the right will activate AutoStick and shift up to the next higher manual ratio unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected In like manner moving the shift lever to the left will activate AutoStick and shift to the next lower manual ratio The manually selected gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster 358 STARTING AND OPERATING HN In AutoStick mode the transmissio
167. The mist feature does not activate the washer TILT STEERING COLUMN pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt steering column lever is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the steering column firmly in place 031507504 Mist Operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Continued the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death Y ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED AY When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the Tilt Steering Column Lever right side of the steering wheel WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause Continued 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been des
168. Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR The most common causes are Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Stone and gravel impact Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve such as steel wool or scouring powder that will hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild scratch metal and painted surfaces car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 clear water kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals e a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint
169. VEHICLE 155 WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Manual Front Seat Adjustment On models equipped with manual seats the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor N While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the Manual Seat Adjusting Bar seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a ever a lever located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height 030907660 a UNDERSTAND
170. VEHICLE 89 LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Y 022606150 Rear Seat Tether Anchors Center Seat LATCH Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach ments in the center seating position Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions Child 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In restraints with flexible webbing mounted lower attach To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint ments can be installed in any rear seating position If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat WARNING belt following the instructions below See the section Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt than one child restraint If you are installing LATCH to check what type of seat belt each seating position has compatible child restraints next to each other you 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
171. Veep OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured Copyright O 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRO
172. Voice Command For best performance e Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least Y inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise e Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather condition NOTE Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for m
173. Wiper Washer Control Lever Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 036407502 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Windshield Wiper Operation Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever Rotate the end of the lever upward clockwise to decrease the delay time and downward counterclockwise to increase the delay time The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approxi mately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed a UNDERSTANDING
174. X24W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Assembly Serviced At Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Turn Stop Lamp 3157 Backup Lamp W16W 921 License Lamp W5W a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE These are halogen bulbs Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually Fog Lamps l he cleari ac 1 Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout Headlamps 2 Remove electrical connector from bulb 1 Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp 2 Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out CAUTION at connector 3 Remove bulb from housing Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 3 Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the by pulling straight back bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 4 Twist the bulb to the left bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Pull bulb outward from assembly 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE MN Rear Tail Turn Signal And Backup Lamps 1 2 3 Raise the liftgate Remove the two push pins from the taillamp housing Grasp the taillamp and pull firml
175. Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pushing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio push the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Push the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or EF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction o
176. a have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 10 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury o50668307 4 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover 5 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the 2 Valve Notch 5 Road Wheel wrench while at the end of the handle for increased 3 Wheel Lug Nut leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct lug nut torque a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 6 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug n
177. a severe initial deceleration Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM Supplemental Side Air Bags Your ve
178. afety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 394 STARTING AND OPERATING IE Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inf
179. air to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off a unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Warning Light If Equipped e This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale What It Means Light Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the ve qe hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood
180. ake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Automatic Transmission Six Speed If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant Six Speed Transmission It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
181. ake your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instrument Clus ter Descriptions or Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 NOTE Under no circumstances shou
182. ally if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Push the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION When rocking a stuck
183. ally be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly push and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed 6 Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate push the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Rolling Code To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps L 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Place the ignition in the
184. alt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when
185. anel for further infor mation 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Push and hold the UNLOCK button on a pro grammed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then push and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pushing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
186. ansceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Troubleshooting Tips WARNING If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death e Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener Your motorized door or gate will open and close to complete the training for a Rolling Code while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people e Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand held transmitter e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door If you have any problems or require assistance please opener that has a stop and reverse feature as call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at required by Federal safety standards This includes HomeLink com for information or assistance most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink com for safety information or assistance a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Gen
187. anty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your Jeep vehicle best has factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts pro vided is
188. any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines e Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Refer to the Uconnect Radio Supplement for further information on Bluetooth connectivity Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BISA mode push either AUX button on the radio or push the VR button and say Bluetooth Streaming Audio Play Mode When switched to BTSA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and played A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio de
189. argo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Fold Down Speakers 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Lever NJ Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Perito washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held for a maximum of 10 seconds Upon release the wiper will continue to cycle two times before returning to the set position Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate the rear washer The If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF th
190. ars old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child re straint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HN Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the
191. ased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration
192. ass could prevent vehicle registration y nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Mainte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station e The MIL will not flash at all and wi
193. ater 2 222 9I 9 ad 338 Break In Recommendations 98 Checking Oil Level ooooooooooooo 497 Coolant Antifreeze o o o o ooo 510 540 COME corria ds pd naa 510 Exhaust Gas Caution 100 428 Fuel Requirements 00000005 424 Jump Starting 6 6 2 ee eee 476 Oils uei cit gee a oe nex ae ala 497 539 540 Oil Filler Cap ess aie gen ts Std 491 492 499 Oil Filter vc SS ae EROR ear ee 500 Oil Selecon sar eses a 498 Oil Synthetie esa a moa eR ya ea s 500 Overhealng to pang aks rias bis eta 451 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 72 Ethanol eee steer aras ad 425 Event Data Recordet socer Ree 75 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 100 428 Exhaust System ess saroe ees 100 507 Exterior Lights i5 essa nter E AX reo 103 Filters Air Cleaner ccs cesh aera Re n 501 Air Conditioning lille 328 504 Etienne Dados ops vUa ce eye RA dere a 500 540 Engine Oil Disposal oooooommoo oo o 500 FlashetS 2s bene bee eer pe CR ko ed 451 Hazard Warning llle 451 TO Signal dau qo REA EX 103 243 538 Flooded Engine Starting oo ooooooooo oo 337 Fluid Btake miis ie a deh es aba ae ee 542 572 INDEX IN Fluid Capacities e iae ha dees id ide 539 Fluid Leaks o ooooooooo oo o 103 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle o o ooo 521 Automatic Transmission LL 519 Cooling st o dere ii
194. ation e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 FCA Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 557 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Puerto Rico And U S Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P O Box 191857 San Juan 00919 1857 Tel 787 782 5757 Fax 787 782 3345 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Se
195. ave the light repaired as soon as possible Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most A STARTING AND OPERATING 375 braking conditions The system automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle control during braking The ABS performs a self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven During this self check you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock Road conditions such as ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa tion s You also may experience the following when ABS acti vates e The ABS motor noise it may continue to run for a short time after the stop The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations Aslight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals e Pumping of t
196. become trapped tem porarily in the ignition switch cylinder If this occurs place the shift lever in PARK rotate the key clockwise slightly and then remove the key as described above If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmis sion into FIRST gear or REVERSE apply the park ing brake turn the engine OFF remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all door
197. been established for the tire size Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off What It Means OFF 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control ESC Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the ve hicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 MPH 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ee e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when
198. below 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an external USB device to connect to the USB port e The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To enter the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either push the AUX button on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob t
199. ber of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING Continued warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the gear selector shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the gear selector shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop 354 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NEUTRAL N CAUTION Use this range when the vehicle is standing for pro
200. bing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that serves you best 022607727 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position After you release the anchorage button try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release but ton To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with a mini latch plate and buckle which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor wh
201. book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To delete a Uconnect phonebook entry using Voice Com mands 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete 3 After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list push the Voice Command button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete 4 After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation
202. cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety 560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HI defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles A complete working kno
203. ces or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an authorized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light rae What It Means Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash de pending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be driv able however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 232 UNDERSTANDING Y
204. cing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pushing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pushing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time push and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or EF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 MUSIC TYPE Butto
205. cking uphill is in REVERSE gear safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these e HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward warnings can result in a collision or serious personal gears The system will not activate if the transmission injury e The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction A STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Towing With HSA WARNING Continued HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back Failure to follow these warnings may cause the while towing a trailer vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an current setting proceed as follows incline while resuming acceleration manually ac tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the v
206. cle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident then you should use low L Off Road if equipped with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle 364 STARTING AND OPERATING HN up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury
207. clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately CAUTION Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
208. coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at www siriusxm ca for Canadian residents A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on push the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Push the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number
209. cond interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position and stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi ately a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Continued WARNING not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment
210. connect o o o o o o o 114 Placard Tire And Loading Information 396 Power Door Locks s ccssar ieee eee corro Mirrors Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Steering 578 INDEX IN SUNTOOL 2 Que bras baaa e ea 193 Transfer Upit 000 rio pared a 523 WindOWS ciar a e a 37 Power Seats DOWN evi co Ei la te el s 153 A daira anra e PUE 153 Rearward 22k e er hk ne Rh ts 153 Tb do 153 o EET 153 Power Steering Fluid o ooooooomooooo oo 542 Power Transfer nit 523 542 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts 55 Preparation For Jacking oes eccere yerta aiaa 456 Pretensioners Seat Belts cesse eb ber Ub pates pt 55 Programmable Electronic Features 254 Radial Ply Tires iue eer 403 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 513 Radio Frequency General Information 0 18 26 30 Radio Operation ois ed en EX 260 316 Radio Sound Systems lille 260 Rear Axle Differential o o ooo 522 Rear Camera cece eee eee 182 Rear Drive Assembly ooooooooooooo oo 522 Rear Liftgate Sedan oooooooomm ooo 39 Rear Seat Folding oooooooomoooo oo 162 Rearview Mirrors 0 ooo o 110 Rear Window Defroster o o oo 211 Rear Window Features o ooo o o 210 Rear Wiper Washer 2 0 0 0000000 0000 210 Recorder Event Data llle 75 Recreational Towing
211. connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains CAUTION Continued visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool MS 90032 ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling p c system in an emergency the cooling system will Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional r
212. creased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in
213. cs may take longer to load than non multisession discs Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the devices volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 042340030 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME co
214. ct Panel Bi Level or Floor mode and move the temperature control to the desired temperature Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607541 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets o Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the winds
215. ction if the CD is within the first second of 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Push and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Reverse button operates in a similar manner AM FM Button Push the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Push this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Push the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Push the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and
216. ction you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not zz exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting And Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition 434 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR
217. cumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the Continued 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING Continued pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines
218. d with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea remains on the H turn the engine off immediately tures a driver interactive display that is located in the and call an authorized dealer for service instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in this section for further informa WARNING tion A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Message Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display M0002 cir rd a Door Ajar SATE o e eh a tr ae be eds Liftgate Ajar LOW rE bewegen Low Tire Pressure BASCADP os de Ke A Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE vases em ba Ee Eae rea Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoCOOE aiii acres w ses Low Coolant NOTE Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in this section for further informati
219. d and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control 408 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since itis not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare
220. d BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Push the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET RND button the stati
221. d by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Canada booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate rep
222. d call has established push and hold the Phone Ke button until you hear a double beep indi cating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Call Termination To end a call in progress 1 Momentarily push the Phone Ke button e Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent 2 To bring the call back from hold push and hold the Phone amp button until you hear a single beep Redial To redial the last number called from your mobile phone using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 1 After the ignition is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Ph
223. d increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Air Conditioning Control Push this button to engage the Air Con ditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures 045607557 while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then sele
224. d or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION Before moving the gear selector shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the gear selector shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position P With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop A STARTING AND OPERATING 347 NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine
225. damage your engine Only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of transmission or air conditioning Such damage is the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty range markings on the dipstick The range markings will If a flush is needed because of component malfunc Consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the procedure range Adding 1 quart 1 liter of oil when the reading is fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil
226. ddition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart 562 significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
227. dersteer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING e The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions e ESC cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions Continued 382 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Vehicle modifications or failure to properly main tain your vehicle may change the handling charac teristics of your vehicle and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system Changes to the steering system suspension braking system tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance Improperly inflated and un evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor mance Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injur
228. disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD A Push the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous sele
229. display will time out in two minutes Push any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Push the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain
230. e This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures A STARTING AND OPERATING 415 NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be incre
231. e RIGHT gt arrow button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from 1 Turn the ignition switch ON the top of the right rear quarter window This is where 2 Push and hold the COMPASS button for approxi the compass sensor is located mately two seconds 3 Push and release the DOWN V arrow button until 15 Compass Variance message and the last variance 14 zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button until 13 the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Push and release the COMPASS button to exit 040506040 Compass Variance Map 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN UCONNECT 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK Uconnect 230 042040029 Operating Inst
232. e a 510 Power Steering s s poe oe a ps 369 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 540 Fog lights pre cir d eg aee a 168 537 Folding Rear Seats i see e aise pee ae 162 Folding Rear Seat Sedan o o 162 Four Wheel Drive 240 359 DYSLEMS xs ect ana eee dha dis aD ee RR d 359 Four Wheel Drive Operation 359 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle o 480 Fuels zas aras dial i 424 AOS os icon pec estote 428 Additives eae iata dt m i eas e b ene LP 426 Capacity i ties ede Eae VUE ies 539 Clean ANE 2 sex bo oed aec a RIPE ade RR ed 424 Ethanol we marisa a EE dE RUE EP and 425 Filler Cap Gas Cap a ss iod Rs 428 Gasoline ss sx Cae acd RC CR Ce ii 424 Gauge ecd b xac x eh a Rep ekus 240 Materials Added 2 0 0 0 0 cee ees 426 Methanol 2 222 2 03 a eden dab Pd 425 Octane Rating 0 0000 424 540 Requirements s 3s ewe Ae eee Ree Gee dn 424 Tank Capacity issena xtc oe hir eae 539 Fuelihg i used ener ae 428 Fus S ciseec mx o ee A Y EEG 530 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 184 191 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 428 430 493 Gasoline Clean Air 0 o ooo o 424 Gasoline Fuel cora tas 424 539 Gasoline Reformulated oo o oo o 424 A INDEX 573 Gauges A RR 240 Gear Ranges eis sd pote neue pd 344 351 Gear Select Lever Override 482 General Information o oooo oo ooo
233. e button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message 3 You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message push the Voice Command button while the system is listing the message and say 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the 11 See you in 15 minutes name or number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 I am on my way List of Preset Messages E ea Yes No 14 Are you there yet 15 Where are we meeting 1 2 3 Where are you 16 Can this wait i 17 Bye for now 4 I need more direction 5 LOL 18 When can we meet 6 Why 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me 7 I love you 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages To turn Voice Text Reply incoming announcement on or off using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone Se button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to t
234. e filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as A C Air Filter Replacement seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of s
235. e gear selector to the NEUTRAL position 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 9 Reinstall the gear selector override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled Gear Selector Override Access Cover vehicle using a commercial towing service 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position but do not start the engine 051010792 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Towing Wheels OFF the Manual 6 Speed Automatic 6 Speed Auto CVT Automatic Condition Ground Transmission FWD Only matic 4WD Transmission Flat Tow NONE If transmission is If transmission NOT operable is operable ALLOWED ae Transmission e Transmission Ti e UB in NEUTRAL in NEUTRAL in NEUTRAL Keyi e 25 mph e 25 mph ey in ACC 40 km h max 40 km h or ON RUN d osition speed Vida i die P e 15 miles 24km 15 miles 24 max distance km max dis tance Wheel Lift Rear NOT NOT NOT or Dolly ALLOWED ALLOWED ALLOWED Tow Front FWD Models OK NOT FWD Models ONLY ALLOWED ONLY Flatbed ALL BEST BEST METHOD BEST BEST METHOD METHOD METHOD a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 With Ignition Key Automatic Transmission e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck all four wheels OFF the ground e Four Wheel Drive 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck all four wheels OFF the ground If t
236. e of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 inch 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immedi ately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued 470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Continued e Tire
237. e pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area You should use low L Off Road if equipped with the 4WD LOCK A STARTING AND OPERATING 363 engaged and ESC turned off Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehi
238. e to steer your vehicle Under these condi fluid temperature and it should be avoided when tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering possible Damage to the power steering pump may effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Occur parking maneuvers NOTE Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel service interval is not required The fluid should only be travel are considered normal and do not indicate that checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are there is a problem with the power steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 370 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper
239. e was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Child Restraints WARNING Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly in
240. e wiper will automatically return to the park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate controls mode control knob Push the button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE
241. ead 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted Position NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of 022607494 the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer Active Head Restraint Normal Position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal
242. eck Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage If leakage is detected Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1 8 inch 4 mm below the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN What Causes Corrosion e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle e
243. ecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Push the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Se
244. ed whichever comes first eisisisisisisis S 8 8 8 8 9 S Sy SS 9 21 Se ES S ss Ala lel Bl sl RIS lasl silzig Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o ol ol o S Se eae a eae e ae 2 39 JEIEIEIETETETEREHHIEITHIEIEE N foe q o o oe ooo r S2 Sl S S alaia Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only WARNING Continued yearly intervals do not apply service job take your vehicle to a competent me WARNING chanic You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a Continued IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE ser 22kDeeren MR RR S 555 Impaired TDD TTV oo oo ooo ooo 557 Prepare For The Appointment 555 Service Contract aae re E re ee Re danda 557 Prepare A List sse cope RR 555 BI WARRANTY INFORMATION 559 Be Reasonable With
245. ed A RS adhered bade 205 Center Mounted Stop sp sts mabaa aa a aa 538 Daytime Running 2e co ens es 168 Dimmer Switch Headlight 166 170 Engine Temperature Warning 229 EXterIOE oo cues a ed ted ont a atras 103 BOR o acce d que e poeta do dte deas tts 168 537 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 240 Headlights llle 167 Headlights On With Wipers 170 175 Headlight Switch esa ritea aiana are t i 167 High Beams es 6rd uem ee d eng s 170 High Beam Low Beam Select 170 Instrument Cluster oooooooooomoooo 167 A cioe Soo eS aie ie ak ae a 538 Lights On Reminder eass 168 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 232 Map Reading 23 49 2s ye Se e 171 Park EL ur 244 Seat Belt Reminder o oooooo o oo 224 Security Alarm sse Rees 19 228 SOEVICE atrae a EE OR Y AS OR te s 537 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 234 Traction Control ie st Se uev 385 Turn Signal 103 166 169 243 538 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 229 243 Loading Vehicle o ooooooooo o 431 432 CapacitieS 7 s 3 ede vun edv stir a ese ed 432 Tir s sgh gl kde Ra e REGE ER REG PEST 395 LOCKS Dc DT 30 Automatic Door o o ooo 33 Child Protection 4 4 04 a4 Rb hs er ee aes 35 Doria aa Ede 30 Power DOE ings arene ese a wears CS BOS 32 Lubrication Body sess era 505 Luggage Rack Roof Rack
246. ed ena 540 B FUSES sackets weedeat nes ES eens 530 e ao sce da sen ESS TTE 540 Integrated Power Module IPM ub c P 542 B VEHICLE STORAGE sessssse 535 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 0L 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Coolant Pressure Cap 3 Engine Oil Fill 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and oth
247. ed to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The Belt Alert feature is active when ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position an intermit tent chime will signal for a few seconds If the driver or outboard front seat passenger if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck led The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu pied BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un buckled if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICL
248. eformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components A STARTING AND OPERATING 425 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy amen genates such as ethanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles CAUTION Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso line containing up to 15 ethanol E 15 Gasoline with line containing more than 15 ethanol E 15 Use of higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim these blends may result in starting and drivability ited Warranty problems damage critical fuel system components If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to f illuminate Please observe pump labels as they Operate in a lean mode should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on than 15 ethanol E 15 e Poor engine performance Problems that result from using gasoline containing more Eo as than 15 ethanol E 15 or gasoline containing methanol Foor colcistarcand cold aive y Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 426 STA
249. eh Pom ties 440 Tread Wear Indicators ponsa racs saa sis matsi 409 Tire Safety Information sre cotie nasii aa aeaea 388 Tire Service Kit 466 467 470 471 473 474 475 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 438 JlOWIDB caci n dica See RE RES tebe DA 433 24 Hour Towing Assistance o oooo 128 Disabled Vehicle o o oooooo 483 Guide seet erisir e ea 437 Recreational sss oe a 446 AA es Sere aie oe eS RR AE gus 437 Towing Assistance 6 6 eee ee 128 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 446 Traction Control 6 0 0 0 000000000000 380 Trailer IoWIDg n cues eem om Re ne ee 433 Cooling System Tips o o oo oooo ooo 445 A one torpe ere t MEA eU Dd 436 A INDEX 583 Minimum Requirements sess 439 TIS ud ette anta doses E a me e RR Maas ae tage 444 Trailer And Tongue Weight 438 WINNE aia aid aa adds Dad 442 Trailer Towing Guide oooooooooooooo o 437 Trailer Weight oct ee dede eme eee erred 437 Transaxle AUtOMAUC ves pp RE pU EE EP PG 12 Transmission Automatic esses es 341 343 518 520 PUI v0 og das cereum ed 518 520 542 Manual sse veu oe ewe Ge ERE adhe 338 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 184 Transporting Pets essuie an nug iaa pE a g i eee 98 Tread Wear Indicators o o o o ooooooo ooo 409 Trip Computer s aac scare ia ra Pack a 246 Tu
250. ehicle Disabling And Enabling HSA e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Continued 380 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward Shift the transmission into PARK Apply the parking brake Start the engine oT A Cc N Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one half turn to the left 6 Push the ESC Off button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should turn on and turn off two times 7 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slighty more than one half turn to the right 8 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the sequence was com pleted properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled 9 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
251. en the seat is folded The mini latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occu pied 1 Remove the mini latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel Mini Latch Stowage 2 Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head 8 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is restraint comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt 4 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the mini latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a click 5 Sit back in seat Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap 6 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 7 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight pull on the Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision
252. ent of a collision Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured Continued WARNING Continued as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision the front half of the head restraint will be extended forward and separated from the rear half of the head restraint See Image Do not drive your vehicle after the AHRs have deployed The head restraint must be reset into the original position to best protect the occupant for all types of collisions An authorized FCA a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver s and WARNING front passenger s sea
253. equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 f your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote Start will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 Any engine warning lamps come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pushed e The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pushed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to dri
254. er 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pushing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folde
255. er information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Push the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message If the problem 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to p
256. eral Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console 034206938 Power Sunroof Switch WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Continued 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING Continued Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project t
257. et into Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of the IPM and possibly result in an electrical system service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the failure air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use in the fresh air and high blower setting This will only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may possibility of compressor damage when the system is result in a dangerous electrical system overload If started again a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base VEHICLE STORAGE Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Header Lamp T578 Center Dome Lamp T578 Rear Cargo Lamp Flashlight 8 A35LF Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Low Beam High Beam Headlamp H13 Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lamp 3757KA Front Fog Lamp PS
258. et speed from memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed km h e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease
259. f a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low tire However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid A STARTING AND OPERATING 419 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFE as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to ma
260. f the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 How To Use Remote Start WARNING All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon e Shift lever in PARK oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon e Doors closed Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled Hood closed Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitte
261. f the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seco
262. filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel
263. firmation Prompts On e Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute
264. from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEU TRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to pre
265. fter a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected it will stay on until the fault is cleared If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the peda
266. g you may push the Voice Command t but ton to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may push the Voice Com mand button to stop playing memos You pro ceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo Delete All to delete all memos a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Setup NOTE Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice Command button first and wait for the beep before To switch to system setup you may say one of the y P Y diio speaking the Barge In commands following Change to setup Voice Training Switch to system setup For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog we nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Main menu setup Voice Voice Training feature may be used e Switch to setup 1 Push the Voice Command button say System In this mode you may say the following commands Setup and once you are in that menu then say gt Enelish Voice Training This will train your own voice to din il Enpla the system and will improve recognition do s 2 Repeat the words and
267. g the transmission A STARTING AND OPERATING 349 In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture The vehicle speed is sufficiently high The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator 350 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch w
268. ge Precautions 467 IEA HCE NGIN ers ie Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 470 Jack Location ce cansa ae ee ae Rs 455 E JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 476 o a a a po ae Preparations For Jump Start 477 Preparations For Jacking 456 O Jump Starting Procedure isses 478 Jacking Instructions oooooooooo o 457 Bl FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 480 450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN E GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE 482 With Ignition Key sisca eas ionii aaas at 485 ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 483 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio A Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO INEMERGENCIES 451 IF YOUR ENGI
269. ge interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Functions e Compass Temperature Audio e Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Units In Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Personal Settings To Reset The Display Pushing and holding the RIGHT gt arrow button once will clear the function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions push and release the RIGHT L arrow button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently dis played function Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio
270. ge the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to
271. ges are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022668725 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit child s Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using the seat weight weight of the child re Child Restraint belt
272. he START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately o e e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight se
273. he Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Voice Tree Phonebook 1st Confirmation 2nd Confirmation Enter Name Number Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup SMS Incoming Mossago Announcement Toggle Confirmation Prompts on off New phone wit temporarily override phone priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Select a language English Espanol or Francais a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Voice Commands
274. he correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 lbs 2 267 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 lbs 4 535 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle a STARTING AND OPERATING 437 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area MA UNa Sain De tongue We Gross Trailer Wt See Note 2 0L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 lbs 450 kg 150 lbs 68 kg 2 4L Auto Man 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 150 Ibs 68 kg 2 4L Auto Man with 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Trailer Tow Prep Package AHC 2 4L Auto With Freedom 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg Drive II Off Road Pack age AWL Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Information in Starting and Operating for further part of
275. he Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 376 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires Modifi cation may result in degraded ABS performance Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The amber Anti Lock Brake Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning
276. he Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM mes sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure values Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired opera tion NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party respons
277. he brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately A STARTING AND OPERATING 373 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Light will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking per formance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You cou
278. he top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of br
279. he transmission is operable Front Wheel Drive FWD and Four Wheel Drive 4WD vehicles with the 6 speed automatic transmission only NOT the Continuously Variable automatic transmission CVT may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following conditions The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km Front Wheel Drive FWD models with 6 speed auto matic only may also be towed under the same limita tions shown above with the rear wheels elevated CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a CVT automatic transmission Damage to the drive train will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Gear Selector Override in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Manual Transmission CAUTION Front Wheel Drive FWD or Four Wheel Drive 4WD a a ae E Gl blur sechs i e DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition round with the transmission in NEUTRAL is related to the clutch transmission or
280. he trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Satety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced a
281. he vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate A STARTING AND OPERATING 433 CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this se
282. held in the flash to pass position for more than 20 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Instrument Panel Dimming Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer
283. hen filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information 418 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place o
284. hicle is equipped with two types of side air bags 1 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIR BAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats 92261 0242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and or vehicle rollover events in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the out board side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury 2 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG 0226004403 Supplemental Side Air
285. hield e Defrost UY Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE NOTE o The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary For information on operating the Rear Defrost refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Recirculation Control Pushing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the outside air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pushed and the mode control is set to panel or pa
286. his dis play Maximum number of characters in file folder names nm Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension nm Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multi session disc formats are supported by the radio Multi session discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multi session discs The use of multi session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Lay
287. hrough the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Push the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any other actua tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof push and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again Closing Sunroof Express Push the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof push and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struc
288. ible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 424 STARTING AND OPERATING HN FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 0L And 2 4L Engine These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide opti mum fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded Regu f lar gasoline having a posted octane num ber of 87 as specified by the R M 2 method The use of higher octane Premium gasoline is not required as it will not provide any benefit over Regular gasoline in these engines While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87 hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern However if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound see your dealer imme diately Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended r
289. ice or oppose of the jacking positon Por kn slippery areas O ample if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel in unm WARNING M o e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off while the vehicle is being jacked the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457 Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To as
290. id trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Child Protection Door Lock Function 021806189 Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which oper ate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position NOTE o For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel fo
291. igned to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Electronic Speed Control Buttons Indicator Light will turn off The system should be 1 ON OFF 3 SET turned off when not in use 2 RES 4 CANCEL a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the s
292. in operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits 392 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 393 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire s
293. ing tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 055007576 Tire Tread 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire 410 STARTING AND OPERATING HN These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 1 6 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to fo
294. injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed Rear Head Restraints The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for information on Tether routing 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward Pull the strap forward to fold the rear seatback flat 0309065497 Folded Rear Seat To raise the seatback pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position 0309063174 Rear Seat Release Straps a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and EJ be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped For additional comfort pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch Then push the seatback to a reclined position approximately 35 degrees maximum and release the strap
295. intain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells 420 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE text message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 0558012399 Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the LOW TIRE text message will no longer be displayed A STARTING AND OPERATING 421 the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
296. ion of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 inch 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469 WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the sid
297. ions for this vehicle 460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060572356 060572357 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461 Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 3 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 4 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts E WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury 462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the
298. is Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 446 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 430 M VEHICLE LOADING ooo 431 A STARTING AND OPERATING 335 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmis sion into PARK apply the parking brake and remove the Key Fob from the ignition When Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with lever in NEUTRAL access to an unlocked vehicle NOTE Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil pressed to the floor dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped e If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key Continued 336 STARTING AN
299. ission in PARK Always block or chock the Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact trai spare tire railer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Total weight must be distributed between the tow and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to vehicle and the trailer such that the following four Tires General Information in Starting And Oper ratings are not exceeded ating for proper tire inflation procedures 1 GVWR Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 441 e e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting And Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a
300. it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Push and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours push the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Push the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit push any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pushing the RW Rewind or EF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob an
301. ithin the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited at very cold temperatures Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal The torque converter clutch will function normally once the trans mission is sufficiently warm Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission CVT If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position NOTE The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmis sion CVT changes ratios in a continuous manner This may sometimes feel as if it is slipping but this is normal and does not harm anything Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears A STARTING AND OPERATING 351 The
302. itter UNLOCK button Push and hold the RIGHT L arrow button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection Flash Lamps With Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN without the sound horn with lock feature selected Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Sound Horn With Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pushed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature Push and hold the RIGHT gt arrow but ton when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Headlamps with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When on is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on If the headlights were turned on by this feature they will also turn
303. ized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power Unlock the power door locks a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON RUN to ignition OFF Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine Air Bag Warning Light The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Occupant Restraint Control 9 ler ORC monitors the internal circuits and N interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in t
304. jured Any child riding in your vehicle Children 12 years or younger should ride properly should be in a proper restraint for the child s size buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the e Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 732 8243 instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s da s website for additional information www tc gc ca Manual and on all the labels attached to the child eng motorvehiclesafety safedrivers childsafety restraint index 53 htm Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two ye
305. k 369 Meee eee pia eaaa 355 W PARKING BRAKE onanoi 370 du LN S ELA CERE AA 373 M FOURWNHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF sLecrRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 7 E ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS ooo 359 Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD 374 E OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS o oo o 360 Brake ey ent Nonnus MENO pon 90s When To Use Low L Off Road With The 4WD Anti Lock Brake System ABS 374 Lock Lever Engaged If Equipped 361 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light 376 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 361 Brake Assist System BAS 377 Hill Climbing irc Rd 363 Hill Start Assist ASA o04 lt s4 is a 377 Driving Through Water 366 Traction Control System TCS 380 After Driving Off Road 367 Electronic Stability Control ESC 381 A STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 386 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 406 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 387 Spare Tires If Equipped 406 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 388 Tite SoM sani cx 55a Bake oi 409 Tire Markings jo iso E pepe aga 388 Tread Wear Indicators 409 Tire Identification Number TIN 392 Life Of Tire 2 ae cca ei Re Tire Terminology And Defi
306. k when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as three 4WD seconds When lit solid There is a 4WD system fault AWD performance will be at a reduced level Ser vice the 4WD system soon When blinking The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means p Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose Properly close the filler cap to disen gage the light If the light does not turn off please see your authorized dealer Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Suse a2 t Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Transmission Temperature Indicator Light Yellow Tell tale Light Transmission Temperature Indicator Light 5 This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with What It Means severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION W
307. k Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 218 M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Bl INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 219 TEIG IEEQUIEEBDS eiei die suites eines 9m E WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS 223 E WM NA RU 7 li oe Red Telltale Indicator Lights 224 EVIC Functions icc LLL 252 Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights 232 Compass Temperature Audio 252 Green Telltale Indicator Lights 243 o O 253 Blue Telltale Indicator Lights 245 Distance To Empty DIE sisse 253 White Telltale Indicator Lights 245 Tire Presse a v eee metas 253 BL MENELSIE COMPUTER IE EQUIBEED ioe x Elapsed Time 000000000 254 Control Buttons o o oooooooooo o 247 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 2 0 eee ee ees 254 E UCONNECT 230 AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK cierra tends dE pe 260 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 260 Operation Inst
308. k after filling WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled 056800424 Fuel Filler Cap Continued 430 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tight ened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odom eter in the instrument cluster Refer to Warning And Indicator Lights in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the odometer trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle i
309. k from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position 022668725 e ALR Switchable
310. l be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning blower is set to low a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu push the Voice Com mand amp button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands and Local commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing The Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command t amp v button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command fw
311. lacing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 372 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued WARNING Continued Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic trans mission in PARK a manual transmission in RE VERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have t
312. lation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 054901778 Example Tire Placard Location Door 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9570R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIR SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation press
313. ld have a collision Have the vehicle checked immedi ately 374 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system EBC This system includes Elec tronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Traction Control System TCS Electronic Stability Control ESC and Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill Descent Control HDC Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position h
314. ld oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time whichever comes first The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4 000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM s This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights 548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN Required Maintenance Intervals At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following Change Indicator System page for the required maintenance intervals e Change oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air
315. le is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the
316. lect the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 DISC Button Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the regi
317. left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 031407550 Front Fog Light Operation a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407551 Turn Signal Operation NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is
318. ll or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in Continued 366 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicles abili ties and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested
319. ll remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicles OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Ma
320. llow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline A STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any question
321. llowing beep say Device Pairing 4 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number e Push the Phone Ke button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e
322. longed periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe DRIVE D practices that limit your response to changing traffic This range should be used for most city and highway or road conditions You might lose control of the driving It provides the best fuel economy The DRIVE vehicle and have a collision position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions A STARTING AND OPERATING 355 When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control if equipped refer to AutoStick CVT in this section for further information to select a lower gear ratio Under these conditions using a lower gear ratio will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup matic
323. loor in the cargo area Tire Service Kit Components And Operation AA Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 2 Deflation Button 3 Pressure Gauge 4 Power Button 5 Mode Select Knob 6 Sealant Hose Clear 7 Air Pump Hose Black 8 Power Plug located on the bot tom side of the Tire Service Kit a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode Pushin the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selecting Sealant Mode EZ Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when selecting this mode Using The Power Button 9 Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Using The Deflation Button v Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operat
324. ls or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor Continued mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine ti
325. m transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid which has the special friction coefficient additives neces sary for proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause belt slip and result in a complete transmission failure Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this sec tion for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
326. may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN LIST Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pushing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pushing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Play Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Push the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3
327. metal objects a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Push and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then push and hold the UN LOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 2
328. mission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is provided Your authorized dealer can check your trans mission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit you authorized dealer immediately to have the fluid level tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle However if the vehicle is frequently driven on rough or unpaved roads on mountain roads on short trips or in heavy city traffic during hot weather or is used for frequent trailer towing police fleet taxi etc change the fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule In addition change the fluid and filter if the 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Automatic Transmission CVT If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant CVT It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimu
329. mmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch be tween LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK five times ending up in the ON RUN position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds push the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door I 021806188 Child Protection Door Lock Location 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Avo
330. mperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System l This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pres sures have been received NOTE W
331. n Pushing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pushing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Push the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception
332. n be In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could Washed with mild soap and water cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart ment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle Removable Load Floor 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Cargo Tie Down Loops WARNING There are four tie downs D rings installed in the cargo A e jie area for securing cargo Cargo tie down loops are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers e The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos sible Cargo Area Tie Downs S Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 WARNING Continued Fold Down Speakers If Equipped When the liftgate is open the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward for tailgating and other activities e Place as much c
333. n will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below e The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated e If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed that shift will not occur e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged e Heavy Anti Lock Brake System ABS application will disengage AutoStick mode e The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right until D is once again displayed in the instru ment cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury A STARTING AND
334. nd lock the vehicle vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to someone or something Only shift into gear when be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a the engine is idling normally and your foot is number of reasons A child or others could be firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmission into PARK apply the parking brake seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs
335. nds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type io No program type or un None defined Adult Hits Adlt Hit 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Program Type sco rn Program Type ds a Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather Oldies Oldies By pushing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is Personality Persnlty displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Public Public station with the same selected Music Type name The Rhythm and Blues R amp B Music Type function only operates when in the FM Religious Music Rel Musc mode A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pushing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the
336. nect to each other without wires or a docking station Uconnect Phone operates no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Na The radio or steering wheel controls if equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone Ke button and Voice Com mand button that will enable you to access the system When you push the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button e VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Actual button location may vary with the
337. necting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING Continued The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information Continued 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the vehicle is running or while the ignition is in the
338. nel floor The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled anna UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Automatic Operation Equipped Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob right knob and the Blower Control knob left knob to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by ro tating the Temperature Control knob center knob Once the com fort level is selected the system will 045638695 maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air Automatic Temperature Controls conditioning the system will auto matically make the adjustment 045640031 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply e Pushing the Air Conditioning Control button while in allowing the system to function automatically Selecting AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button the O OFF position on the blower control stops the to flash three times and then turn
339. ng enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly a
340. ng on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have procedure This procedure consists of programming a been programmed to the vehicle electronics blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed Replacement Keys NOTE
341. nitions 394 Replacement Tires Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 395 M TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 412 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 400 BM TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 413 Tire Press r Sort ex a xa te ees a eee 400 B TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Tire Inflation Pressures o ooooo o 401 Cor aid Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 403 Paces ane Eee hS Tet aaees id Radial Ply Tires ERECTO EET OT TEE 403 Premiun ME LE Me General Information riso d ninenin ei 423 Tire Types i recco a AO 404 334 STARTING AND OPERATING HN M FUEL REQUIREMENTS o o o ooooooo 424 Vehicle Certification Label 431 2 0L And 24L Engme i ser n 424 W TRAILER TOWING 005500300 e 9 eye ws 433 Reformulated Gasoline 424 Common Towing Definitions 433 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 425 Trailer Hitch Classification 436 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 425 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight MMT In Gasoline ics 426 A a AA d Materials Added To Fuel 00 0000 e ee E EE i Fuel System Cautions oooooooooooo 427 o A dd Carbon Monoxide Warnings 428 TONO Pr et j B ADDING FUEL ice gs WRECREATONALTOWINGGEHIND A cap OU 4D aros pra ed is Towing Th
342. ns rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons located on either the overhead 034033576 console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system EJ To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE 034000355 e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security erase channels when programming additional buttons Alarm is active HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner e If you have any problems or require assistance please Before You Begin Programming HomeLink call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the
343. nsmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow None e Transmission in NEU NOT ALLOWED TRAL e Key in ACC Position Dolly Tow Front FWD Models ONLY FWD Models ONLY Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer All OK OK NOTE e When recreational towing your vehicle always follow applicable state and provincial laws Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de tails e Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreational towed flat towed at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position A STARTING AND OPERATING 447 CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 451 Road Tire Installation 5 5 5222 mns 463 B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 600490 451 W TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 254 466 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Tire Service Kit Storag cara idas tes 466 SPECIFICATIONS ou caras a E ede 452 Tre Service Kit Components And Operation 5466 A eria ae Tire Service Kit Usa
344. nter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Push the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then push the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument P
345. ntrol knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of
346. nuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and nents as the chemicals can
347. nward until the entire seat belt is extracted 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING Continued Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it only used to install rear facing or forward facing to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking child restraints that have a harness for restraining Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency the child locking mode Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR WARNING These head restraints are passive deployable compo The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea identified by any markings only through visual inspec ture or any other seat belt function is not working tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split properly when checked according to the proce in two halves with the front half being soft foam and dures in the Service Manual trim the back half being decorative plastic e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work increase the risk of injury in collisions e Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain The Occupant Restraint Controller
348. ny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between 4 and 22 In very cold weather EE if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS M STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission If Equipped Automatic Transmission If Equipped Normal Starting unica Rm Extreme Cold Weather Below 22 F Or 30 C o oo o mo ooo If Engine Fails To Start O After Starting ss es rar ede nos E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 337 337 337 338 338 Downshifting Recommended Shift Speeds Five Speed Manual Transmission ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Equipped CVT If Equipped Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission 332 STARTING AND OPERATING HN B AUTOSTICA 0 ear ERR X ei 35b M POWER STEERING ire Rn 369 AutoStick Six Speed Automatic Transmission Power Steering Fluid Chec
349. o select the next or previous track a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 e e e e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or push the VR button and say Next Track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or push the VR button and say Previous Track Jump backward in the current track by pushing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pushing and holding the FF gt gt button A single push backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pushing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or push the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing push the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pushing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button push will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pushing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or push the VR button and say Repeat
350. of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 NOTE e It is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any ac
351. of the vehicle The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the le
352. off when the wipers are turned off To make your selection push and release the RIGHT gt arrow button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 either front vehicle door will cancel this feature Push and hold the RIGHT L arrow button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When On is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection push and release the RIGHT arrow button until On or Off appears Display
353. oll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or external USB device e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts Pushing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track push the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and push the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or
354. olvents or similar ingredients These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials A STARTING AND OPERATING 427 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per formance and damage the emissions control sys CAUTION Continued The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered tem under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 428 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in e
355. on LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odometer display area Refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information on fuses and fuse locations CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The odometer display will toggle be tween CHAngE and Oil for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style 5 Fuel Gauge e The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where
356. on in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the transmission controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmis sion cools down During very cold temperatures 4 F 20 C or below transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmis sion temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam agin
357. on code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Continued CAUTION Continued Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Push the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Push the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Push and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from
358. on will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and EM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pushing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 inch 2 5 cm a
359. one and transfer of the call to the mobile phone a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 2 After the ignition is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone 3 An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais 3 Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Push the Phone Ke button to begin 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II After the Read
360. only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehic
361. onsiveness in the steering NOTE e Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response e Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door 402 STARTING AND OPERATING HN At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire
362. oooooo oo ooo 41 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 424 Oil Change Indicator oooooooooomo o 251 a INDEX 577 Oil Change Indicator Reset 251 Oil ENEIDE rita e ai 497 539 540 Capacity conocia iaa na tremi sgt 539 Change Intervalo e sers een rne d 498 Checking air em deed REPE Ra e 497 Disposal iere anro d Penne pue aha aa ens 500 lulu io coser eds 500 540 Filter Disposal 200 os agenda 500 Identification Logo ooooooooommooo 499 Materials Added To 000 500 Pressure Warning Light 228 Recommendation 0000008 498 539 Synth tie sk ae aia uo ee Bele ee ae Es 500 VISCOSILY u esca eae rt ee a ee d 499 Oil Filter Chatige ssec m RH wane 500 Oil Filter Selection oo oooooo oo 500 Oil Pressure Light o o o o ooo ooo oo 228 Onboard Diagnostic System oe ecs cco ea coea 493 Opener Garage Door HomeLink Operating Precauti0nS oo ooooomo ooo 493 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine sii soe pe RE s 451 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 560 Paint Care aia ere rena aca siete dies ERE Ded 523 Panic Alarm ioi ecl mr rm bie 24 Parking Drake iussa uy mum ate ERES 370 Passing Light i cose a Os 170 Personal Settings sico pira a Fake ne ees 254 Pers pad lt sae don oe va eed bas 98 Phone Cellular o ooo o 114 Phone Hands Free U
363. or further infor mation For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch be tween LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds push the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance with local laws 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Mn Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically if o e e The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK The driver s door is opened The doors were not previously unlocked Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Progra
364. ossibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Fil
365. ost number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under Low to medium blower setting Low to medium vehicle speed Low road noise Smooth road surface Fully closed windows Dry weather conditions Operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incoming and Missed Calls Voice Text Reply Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your 8 y phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message 1 Push the Phone Ne button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages 3 Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 1 Push the Phone N
366. ow tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse CAUTION Continued quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using ec as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size of reasons including the installation of replacement or type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the Sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS from functioning properly Always check the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Sensor to become inoperable After using an after tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the market tire sealant it is recommended that you take replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your to continue to function properly sensor function checked CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and waming have
367. ower Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully Continued CAUTION Continued e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others
368. paired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero 2 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indi cates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem perature when driving in hot weather or up moun tain grades It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 CAUTION 4 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Odometer Display Trip Odometer Dis Driving with a hot engine cooling system could play damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle Equippe
369. phrases when prompted by Language Spanish Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the Voice Training blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only e Tutorial 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME SEATS Power Seats If Equipped Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Some models may be equipped with a power driver s vehicle seat The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use the switch to move the WARNING seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 0309053383 Power Seat Switch a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious
370. plemental Restraint System Air Bag 62 Synthetic Engine Oil sema e aes 500 System Remote Starting o oooooooooo o oo 26 Taillights as ertum na ice imer sc Ans 538 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 321 Tie Down Hooks Cargo o oooooooo cm o 208 Tilt DOWI a 2 ie isle Oa YOUR ORE OEC oe ia UD iotesus doa taste duse eedem Pase Has edo E a dus Tilt Steering ColumM ooooooooooooooo oo Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire MatkinBs arios va os was ER da TIteS ies chier en eee ae ee Aging Life Of Tires 3 edo eterne 582 INDEX IN Aur Pressure s o caidas ae Re eS 400 Chains sabes oe ein ack Se renta toe S eR 412 Changing 4e age AR EIER pe 454 Compact Spare esee eee ean pid 407 General Information 400 406 FTI GN Speed cues odere neret ene de eR aie 403 Inflation Pressures llle 401 E sides Oa ponga innato d 454 Life Of Tires oe daba med a PR d 410 Load Capacity 2 00 395 396 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 414 Pressure Warning Light 234 Quality Grading e escri sef aeaa enea 561 Radial 2342353 Ra Ere eae e s 403 Replacement 6 6 2 6 000 411 Rotation es errasse deb ae T EUER 413 Safety its sree glares 388 400 SIZES ari pue d dod a EAS we 390 SHOW TAOS X d reme Seis di ark ae 405 Spare Tire aa iee aane iaa 406 408 456 Opinnimpg int ato Pea alee MASA ale Reed 409 Trailer TOWING xad Euh b
371. preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen appears again If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned On the rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex ceeds 8 mph 13 km h the transmission is shifted into PARK or the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF position Static grid lines will illustrate the width
372. pressure s have been received NOTE When filling warm tires the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi 30 kPa above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Service TPMS Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor s is not being received 0558012401 Tire Pressure Monitoring Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM 422 STARTING AND OPERATING HN text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket
373. protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover Refer to Engine Compartment in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 072739988 Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 1 20 Amp Blue B Trailer Tow If Equipped 2 i 15 Amp Lt Blue AWD 4WD Control Module If Equipped 3 10 Amp Red Rear Center Brake Light Switch 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 4 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Clock Spring 5 15 Amp Lt Blue Battery Feed For Power Tech 6 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Steering Control Sat ellite Radio Hands Free Phone 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw i 30 Amp Green Ignition Off Draw 9 40 Amp Green Power Seats 10 i 20 Amp Yellow Power Locks Interior Lighting 11 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Outlet 12 20 Amp Yellow 115V AC Inverter If Equipped 13 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter 14 10 Amp Red Instrument Cluster 15 40 Amp Green Radiator Fan 16 15 Amp L
374. put ton You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IE e Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth Stream Radio FM ing mode To switch to the FM band say EM or Radio FM In e Memo to switch to the memo recorder this mode you may say the following commands e System Setup to switch to system setup e Frequency to change the frequency Radio AM e Next Station to select the next station To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In e this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Previous Station to select the previous station Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Satellite Radio Disc Mode To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite To switch to the disc mode say
375. r mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original A STARTING AND OPERATING 407 equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replace
376. r further information WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI Power Window Switch Location Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls on the rear pas senger doors push the window LOCKOUT switch To enable the rear window controls push the window LOCKOUT switch a second time Window Lockout Switch LIFTGATE NOTE The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate To unlock the liftgate insert the key into the lock and turn to the right manual lock models only The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
377. r list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pushing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Push the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Push and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Push and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak ers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Push this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound
378. rake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the gear selector shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmission into PARK apply the parking brake turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A chil
379. ramming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner 19 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor IR 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light NOTE If the
380. re used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed STARTING AND OPERATING 413 The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E E mm a gt 8 055707139 Tire Rotation 414 STARTING AND OPERATING HN TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 0 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressur
381. re allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear
382. red Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then push the Voice Command button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could push the Voice Command button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following e Setup Con
383. reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 563 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 566 INDEX IN Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 512 Adding Fuel sag ere sette ot Sse Grea 428 Adding Washer Fluid ooooooooooo 506 Additives Fuel o eee eee 426 Adjust DOWI aparta nho doped Datars da ERROR E Aral a 153 Forwarding se dea ete ged Pus 153 Rearward iocos e 9r eed as 153 L ed qwe ced P WEAR rer AE AA 153 Air B g 5 ta gaig Gara dea eei daa ni 61 62 Advance Front Air Bag o ecseri esia rumst o 63 Air Bag Operation 00000000 64 Air Bag Warning Light 73 Enhanced Accident Response 72 Event Data Recorder EDR 75 Front Air Batis css eda geese ng re ed 61 If A Deployment Occurs ssu sesa termanis ooo 71 Knee Impact Bolsters o o o o o o ooo o 65
384. remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m M12 x 1 5 19 mm Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice 454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Torque Patterns vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
385. res for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E B MIRRORS cz aa 110 Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Inside Day Night Mirror 110 Se pati aea los s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 110 ll Uconnect PHONE IF EQUIPPED 114 Outside Mirror Driver Side 111 OBST a aunts eds ane Outside Mirror Passenger Side 111 rong Gel Li is Folding Outside Mirrors 112 ne PM ES erario Power Mirror
386. riority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced push the Voice Command but ton and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Push the Phone Ne button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also push the Phone amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones To delete mobile phones paired with the Uconnect phone using Voice Commands 1 Push the Phone Ke button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 3 At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also push the Phone amp button at any time while the list is being played and choose the phone you wish to delete 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tu
387. rm will rearm itself To Disarm The System Push UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times and exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle However you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021410235 Three Button RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with
388. rn Signals UCI Conrectors x22 9 RR ia aia aaa 306 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 132 Operations a sk ae ek eR DA naa G 116 Phone Call Features oo oo oooo oo oo 123 Phone Features 4 8 doe do Ge Gute eR RE its 127 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Ph ne socio ar 134 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode 289 Operating Instructions CD Mode 284 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 281 290 Playing MP3 Piles o o o oooomo ooo 286 Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio Multimedia Satellite Radio Operating Instructions CD Mode Operating Instructions Radio Mode Playing MP3 Files 584 INDEX IN Uconnect Hands Free Phone 114 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 218 Uniform Tire Quality Grades essas e eteris ass 561 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 306 Universal Transmitter o o o o oooo ooo 184 Unleaded Gasoline o oooooooooooo 424 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 49 Vanity Mirrors 4400 gis a Ue cared eo a a 113 Variance COMPASS 6 maet pie eee eee 258 Vehicle Certification Label 431 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading oooooooo o 396 431 432 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Security Alarm Security Alarm 18 Vehicle Storage oooooooooommooo ooo 327 535
389. rollover events The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro priate based on the severity and type of collision Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate A slower developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle A a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 faster developing event may deploy the seat belt preten sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle The rollover sensing system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners with or without the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along
390. ronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the Integrated Center Stack ICS for added conve nience This power outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the 12 Volt Power Outlet fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited or ACC position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug Warranty into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the
391. rovision and is No function 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www siriusxm com or at www siriusxm ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number
392. rs Hazard switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pushed could cause serious injury Or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pushed e System not disabled from previous remote start event e Vehicle Security Alarm not active 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Remote Start Aborted L Gate Ajar Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Push and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if
393. ructions DISC Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 269 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 271 LIST Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA ld DITE 274 INFO Button DISC Mode For MP3 WMA Play x cuida a xe Res 274 Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped 276 Display Units Of MeasureIn 254 M UCONNECT 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED sario auge acini Read ador Bet tig 280 Operating Instructions Voice Command System JfEqupped seer ice e ex 280 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped sico 04 doe RR ERR RES 280 B UCONNECT 130 v ERERR ibid cas 281 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 281 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play sese Rma 284 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 286 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 289 UCONNECT 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 290 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 290 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And List Or Browse Mode o o o o 310 ins AER ae cing ees a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BISA 312 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 298 E STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 314 LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 301 Radio
394. ructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 SEEK Buttons Push and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Push the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pushing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search push the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Push this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details If your vehicle
395. rupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire A STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low L Off Road With The 4WD Lock Lever Engaged If Equipped
396. rvice operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited 558 Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HI We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be plea
397. s The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems
398. s The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade A STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking b
399. s 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 650 lbs 294 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 398 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg Occupants rot see TOTAL Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 400 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 399 400 STARTING AND OPERATING HN W
400. s When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pushed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Bi Level Mix or Floor and then push the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN adequate system lubrication to minimize the p
401. s esercenti dex X kW I dees 112 id Indios qeagicsad n Heated Mirrors If Equipped 113 a a MER abd s E i Ml E Me General Information iles 145 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In ll VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED 145 Folding Rear Seat e s Edo xr 162 Voice Command System Operation 145 Reclining Rear Seat If Equipped 163 Commands seris con RE ERE dues 147 M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 164 Voice Training 0 000000 151 BM LIGHTS cojos ks ba one n EORR ba 166 B SEATS l ooidsees s r Rene ree 152 Multifunction Lever o o ooooo o o 166 Power Seats If Equipped 152 Headlights And Parking Lights 167 Heated Seats If Equipped 154 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 167 Manual Front Seat Adjustment 155 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 168 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Lights On Reminder oo o o o o oo 168 Equipped vinos iodo us ir t d 156 Fog Lights I Equipped 168 Manual porba M PPPE QA teeta as id Turn Signals cien 169 Driver s Seatback Recline 157 High Low Beam Switch 0000 170 Head Restraints 000 158 Flash To Pass da 170 a UNDERSTANDING THE
402. s started Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information A STARTING AND OPERATING 431 VEHICLE LOADING The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin Vehicle Identification Number VIN istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle Vehicle Certification Label This includes driver passengers and cargo The total Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to per ust be limited so that you do not exceed the the driver s door B Pillar LE Tire Size The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires e Month and year of manufacture must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Vehicle Identification Number HEN This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size Type of Vehicle listed Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH Rim Size 432 STARTING AND OPERATING HI Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of t
403. s you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and Continued 412 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size WARNING Continued braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices capacity other than what was originally equipped are not recommended on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains a
404. s activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pushing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Push the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory push the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and push and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pushing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Push the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pushing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 1
405. s are on What It Means UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Blue Telltale Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light SS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control BD lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on flash to pass scenario White Telltale Indicator Lights Cruise Control On Indicator Light White Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control On Indicator Light CRUISE This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Hill Descent Indicator Light If Equipped White Tell tale Light 4 e What It Means Hill Descent Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control HDC feature is turned on The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED NOTE The system will display the last known outside The Mini Trip
406. s requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games consoles will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually unplug the device and plug it in again To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if 115 Volt Power Outlet plugged in long enough the vehicles battery will 035006145 discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting WARNING T th o avoid serious injury or dea Continued e Do not use a three prong adaptor e Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Continued A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 CAUTION
407. s when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the right To unlock the door turn the key to the left Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will not function a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turni
408. sed with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 559 WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA
409. smission CVT If Equipped Use only MOPAR CVTF 4 Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Automatic Transmission Six Speed Use only MOPAR SP IV M Automatic Transmission Fluid or If Equipped equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid Rear Drive Assembly RDA We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Power Transfer Unit PTU We recommend you use MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Bl MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 546 Maintenance Chart 000 549 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to t
410. soline o o oooooooo os 424 Cleaning Wheels oo eaters acid aca TTA a EUR a ida 525 Climate Control ooo erir ia 316 Clock uec be a 262 282 291 Cl tchi vues e dae xa EXE ORG c d dta 516 Clutch Fl ds x 2 6 sace ai e ae 516 Coin Holder ena gk oS ees 204 Cold Weather Operation o ooooooooooooo ooo 337 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 315 Compact Spare Tire esso RE Rees 407 COMPASS ces eset eree o Rx de a 246 Compass Calibration llle 258 Compass Variance xa xA Ros ch ae LAE Rs es 258 Connector UCI Universal Consumer Interface UCI Console ow e eR Y Ea eda 204 Contract Service leen 557 Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap Cooling System cese IT s Adding Coolant Antifreeze Coolant Level Disposal Of Used Coolant Drain Flush And Refill Inspection Points To Remember Pressure Cap Radiator Cap Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze Corrosion Protection llle esses 570 INDEX IN Cupholders sece igs as x Reha e 204 Customer Assistance oo ooo 555 Data Recorder Event o ooooooooo 75 Dealer Service ooo ooooooooooo oo s 496 Defroster Rear Window 000 002 eee 211 Defroster Windshield 101 319 325 Delay Intermittent Wipers ooooooooo o 174 Diagnostic System Onboard 493 Dimmer Switch Headlight o o o o o
411. solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Continued 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING Continued Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assem blies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc FUSES WARNING e When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage Continued WARNING Continued Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer e If a general
412. speed by pushing the SET button a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be
413. starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be
414. sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated operating the jack or changing the wheel against the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body 0605006372 Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455 WARNING Continued Jack Location under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the cargo area on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Spare Tire And Jack Stowage 456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Spare Tire Stowage 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor 3 Set the parking brake in the cargo area 8 4 Place the gear selector in PARK automatic transmis Spare Tire Removal sion or REVERSE manual transmission Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 5 Turn OFF the ignition Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding
415. sure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIS a LQ Jack Warning Label NOTE Refer to Tires General Information in Start ing And Operating for further information about the spare tire it s use and operation 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly 060600626 Removing Jack Handle From Jack NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange assembly The rear location is the same but with two rectangular cutouts For vehicles equipped with plastic trim the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body Jacking Locations CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instruct
416. system voltage greater If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in alternator or electrical system may occur another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly WARNING so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477 Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws located on the radiator support Positive Battery Post 0608037729 Air Intake Finger Screws 478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shif
417. t is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use CAUTION To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT carry any loads on the luggage rack without crossbars installed The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or some other protection between the load and the roof surface e To avoid damage to the luggage rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum luggage rack load capacity of 150 Ib 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Continued 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II CAUTION Continued WARNING Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rac
418. t Blue Dome Lamp Sunroof Rear Wiper Motor a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 17 10 Amp Red Wireless Control Module 18 40 Amp Green Auto Shutdown Relay 19 20 Amp Yellow Radio Amplifiers 20 15 Amp Lt Blue Radio 21 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module Siren If Equipped 22 i 10 Amp Red Heating AC Compass 23 a 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay 24 15 Amp Lt Blue Power Sunroof If Equipped 25 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror If Equipped 26 15 Amp Lt Blue Auto Shutdown Relay 27 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module 28 10 Amp Red Airbag Control Module Occupant Classification Module 29 Hot Vehicle No Fuse Required 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description 30 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seat If Equipped 31 10 Amp Red Headlamp Washer If Equipped 32 30 Amp Pink Auto Shutdown Relay 33 10 Amp Red J1962 Conn Powertrain Control Module 34 30 Amp Pink Antilock BrakeValve 35 40 Amp Green Antilock Brake Pump 36 30 Amp Pink Headlamp Washer Control Smart Glass If Equipped 37 25 Amp Clear Diesel Heater and H2 MOD power top a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 CAUTION When installing the IPM cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to g
419. t before driving Personally attempt ing to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all that could impair their function types of collisions Have deployed AHRs reset by an authorized dealer immediately Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light AF 022607494 Steering Wheel and Column AHR In Reset Position e Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters e Advanced Front Air Bags 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e Supplemental Side Air Bags e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Seat Belt Pretensioners e Seat Belt Buckle Switch e Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the Locations instrument panel above the glove compartment The 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster the air bag covers 3 Driver Knee Impact Bolster 0226072907 a THINGS TO KNOW B
420. t cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust E ment button located at the base of the head restraint and DA push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Adjustment Button 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your h
421. t the automatic transmission into PARK manual transmission to NEUTRAL and battery explosion turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479 CAUTION 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of Failure to follow these procedures could result in the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle and the fuel injection system or the discharged vehicle WARNING NOTE Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this Jump Starting procedure Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative t of the disch d Th Iti lectri Connecting The Jumper Cables post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could result in personal injury Only use the specific positive
422. tach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the Continued WARNING Continued tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap proved tether anchorages in your vehicle Www 0226047162 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to P ua Li a W install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat routing it over the center of the head restraint 022606150 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram Tether Anchorage Locations 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to in
423. tant Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 404 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat e The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a Y of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer
424. ted for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning light is on Be sure to clean t
425. ter position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Can two child restraints be attached using Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Seats With LATCH a common lower LATCH anchorage Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Can the head restraints be removed No Yes Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to in stall a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchor ages in an outboard position The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more information 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion y 0226071860 Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Locating Tether Anchorages 4 There are tether strap anchorages behind each J rear seating position located on the back of the seat a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
426. ter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter service intervals UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button _ VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between J and 2 Set the temperature control at zi to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the ES button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort WARM WEATHER Press the lt 5 button to turn recirculate off 5 If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 7 and turn the air conditioning on If WX Es it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 74 74 COOL OR COLD Press the lt gt button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 4 and then turn the air be 856 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 tu E the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 38 and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near 4 If itis sun
427. the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause gt II You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are avail able on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pushing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e Angle Repeatedly pushing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD Power Allows you to turn the power ON and OFF if equipped Lock Locks out rear remote controls if equipped CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pushing the AUDIO
428. the combined weight of occupants and cargo and information should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety 438 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire And Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle A STARTING AND OPERATING 439 Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
429. the radio a The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pushing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Push the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Push this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 RW FF CD MODE Push and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pushed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM Or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File System
430. tion 5 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers it The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off or full off cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in Full Off mode if equipped Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others A STARTI
431. tion in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next push the switch forward and release to Express Close Venting Sunroof Express Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 19 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Elect
432. tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the l
433. tire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warn ings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also is stamped into the right front body on the right front seat crossmember under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Right Front Body VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Ignition Key Removal o oooooooooo o 12 Locking Doors With A Key 14 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 B SENTRY KEY ooooooooococmocmom 15 Replacement Keys o o o o o oo oo ooo ooo 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information ooo ooooooo 18 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIP PED 2 2 dee ede Do iaa 18 To Arm The System o ooooooooooooo ooo 19 Rearming The System ooooooooo ooo 19 To Disarm The S
434. to install a forward facing child restraint up to straint for using the Tether Anchor the recommended weight limit of the child re with the seat belt to attach a for straint ward facing child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the touch the back of the front passen child restraint is allowed if the child restraint ger seat manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be re No moved Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position tighten the seat belt against the belt with an ALR retractor path of the child restraint Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat
435. torial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features push the Phone amp button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode push and hold the Voice Command w button for five seconds until the session begins or e Push the Voice Command button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either push the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset To Reset all settings using Voice Command 1 Push the Phone e button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e This will delete all phone pairing phone book en tries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings
436. trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 453 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision 442 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 453 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to
437. transmission oil may become too hot If this happens the transmission overheat indica tor light will come on and the vehicle will slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the high speed is maintained the overheating may reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days the auto AUTOSTICK AutoStick Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the six available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position Tapping to enter AutoStick mode will down shift the transmission to the next lower gear while using 356 STARTING AND OPERATING HN to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear When AutoStick is active
438. trict eri e hs 369 Radiator Coolant Pressure 513 Carbon Monoxide Warning 100 428 Cargo Area Cover scc dba die dee weeds 205 Cargo Area Features 0 0 0000000004 205 Cargo Compartment 0 0 000004 205 Light iisikcersseeal hg 9 RO a cia Eee 205 Luggage Cartier ces aie cR tea 212 Cargo Light cede emus cs 205 Cargo Load PloOE 445 3 ea dcr i renkes 207 Cargo Ti DOWDS arse Re e e CR Recte 208 Car Washes curada quee eR Whew OEC ads 524 Cellular Phone tardado eae 114 Center High Mounted Stop Light 538 Chains De ux ene sd 412 Changing A Flat Tire 454 Chart Tite SIZING is REG E GS Rep s 390 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 494 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 99 Checks Sale 5 3 scite cin aa e bg eae ge 99 Child Restraints coxis 4 44004 dea ad 77 Child Restraints Booster Seats 4 zu eee Bee we EN deed 82 Child Restraints o o oo 77 Child Seat Installation 95 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 91 Infants And Child Restraints 80 Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 90 A INDEX 569 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat B lb oss E O 92 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 84 Older Children And Child Restraints 80 Seating Positions vie re 83 Child Safety Locks ia use ger a etn 35 Clean Air Ga
439. uld jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver 378 STARTING AND OPERATING HN does not apply the throttle before this time expires the is in PARK or NEUTRAL For vehicles equipped with system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will a manual transmission if the clutch is pressed HSA roll down the hill as normal will remain active The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate i WARNING e The feature must be enabled There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist HSA will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle or e Park brake must be off while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other e The vehicle must be stopped e Driver door must be closed The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve Math 1 hicle under all road conditions Your complete atten i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle tion is always required while driving to maintain ba
440. umulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation A STARTING AND OPERATING 369 POWER STEERING system This noise should be considered normal and it The standard power steering system will give you good does not in any way damage the steering system vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability CAUHON in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical CAUTION steering capability if power assist is lost Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering still be possibl
441. ure to do so or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates may adversely affect the safety and the possibility of loss of vehicle control handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures 406 STARTING AND OPERATING HN While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more info
442. ures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual A STARTING AND OPERATING 397 NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating sec tion of this manual 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 lb 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 294 kg since 5 x 150 lbs 68 kg 750 lb
443. ushing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Par tial Off mode the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Trailer Sway control TSC if equipped is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode Full Off Four Wheel Drive Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pushing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC OFF Indicator 384 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will appear in the odometer Push and release the Trip Odom eter button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 3
444. ust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Continued Continued 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period itis important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of FCA Ma terial Standard MS 90032 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements
445. ut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct lug nut torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 1 4 inch 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is located under the load f
446. ute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the gear selector shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always shift the transmission into PARK apply the parking brake turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a num
447. ve the vehicle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ma General Information DOOR LOCKS The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Manual Door Locks Frequency RF devices equipped in this vehicle Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and inside the vehicle If the lock knob is down when the door with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s is closed the door will lock Make sure the keys are not Operation is subject to the following two conditions inside the vehicle before closing the door 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or
448. vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec tor 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the gear selector override access cover located on the right side of the gear selector housing WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 6 Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port and push and hold the override release lever forward 7 Move th
449. vel Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets o Mix I Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost ov Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN e Air Conditioner Control Push this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 04563869 the Mode control dial Push this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control
450. vice or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or push the VR fm button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone Previous Track Use the SEEK DOWN button or push the VR button on the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode A UNDE
451. vious use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473 If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the P
452. water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use low L Off Road if equipped with the 4WD LOCK engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maxi mum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the transaxle transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy A STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increas ing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the
453. wer mirror control is located on the driver s door trim panel Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Folding Outside Mirrors The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved manually either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full Power Mirror Control rearward and normal To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To use the vanity mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward
454. wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel prop erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts osos33619 6 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left Mounting Spare Tire 7 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased CAUTION leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem each nut has been tightened twice Refer to Torque facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the Specifications in this section for the correct lug nut spare tire is mounted incorrectly torque If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463 correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 8 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Release the parking brake Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means pro vided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 9 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo are
455. wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control STARTING AND OPERATING 409 Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or to help you in determining when your tires should be for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop replaced ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinn
456. window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire The LOW TIRE text message and the graphic with the low tire pres sure flashing will be displayed A STARTING AND OPERATING 423 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h t
457. wing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals A STARTING AND OPERATING 445 AutoStick If Equipped When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 446 STARTING AND OPERATING HN RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Tra
458. wledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561 Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in a
459. xhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can ADDING FUEL time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left side vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure running for more than a short period adjust the the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 429 CAUTION After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s e Damage to the fuel system or emission control surface system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tan
460. y prompt and the following beep say WARNING Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency This feature is supported in the U S Canada and your mobile phone must be Mexico e Turned on NOTE e Paired to the Uconnect System e Have network coverage e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e Push the Phone Ke button to begin If you need roadside assistance e If supported this number may be programmable on After the Ready prompt and the following beep say some systems To do this push the Phone Ke button Towing Assistance and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE You should program the desired Towing Assis tance phone number using the Voice Command system To do this push the Phone Ke button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance When prompted say 1 800 521 2779 for U S Canada say 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico
461. y and death ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes for four wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two wheel drive equipped vehicles Full On Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off Four Wheel Drive Models Or On Two Wheel Drive Models This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC OFF A STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily push the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of Operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by p
462. y to disengage the light from the aperture panel Twist and remove socket from the light Remove bulb from socket and replace License Lamps 1 Usea screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull the bulb from the socket Center High Mounted Stoplamp This light is an LED assembly See your authorized dealer for replacement a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 13 6 Gallons 51 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 0L and 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters API Certified Cooling System 2 0L and 2 4L Engine MOPAR 7 2 Quarts 6 8 Liters Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade
463. your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Continued WARNING Continued A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing inter nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you e A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger ous Your body could strike the
464. ystem oooomoooo o 19 Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override 20 ll REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED 4 2 3444 peel hex are e 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 O Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All First Pr ssec dte Tadaa Gk A wR RS be ee Be 21 Illuminated Approach If Equipped 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 22 Vehicles ou ae area d 29 Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock Unlock 23 ee E pene v qtutsdes a General Information 0 45 30 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 E DOORLOCKS cece eee e eee 30 Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 TERT NER 30 General Information o oo o oooooo o 26 ee aaa 3 V EQUIPPED vs cresceret 25 Chile Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOS tarada e fX PEE Is 35 How To Use Remote Start 27 E POWER WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED 37 ae pa rr pal ea Power Window Switches 37 To Enter Remote Start o o oo 28 OA ossis dp ae O cba 9B Window Lockout Switch 39 a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
465. zed operation When the alarm is activated the interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals the horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm After approximately 16 seconds the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Ala

Owners Manual Pdf

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents